JP7066469B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Proposed a pachinko gaming machine that is configured to be able to set to any of the set values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and is configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set values. Has been done. For example, there has been proposed a pachinko gaming machine capable of performing operations such as changing a set value while the front frame of the pachinko gaming machine is open (see, for example, Patent Document 1). On the other hand, a pachinko gaming machine provided with a control means (for example, a main board) provided with a plurality of input ports has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-77349

When the technique described in Patent Document 2 is applied to a gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, a member that outputs a predetermined signal is connected to an input port corresponding to the position where the member is provided. However, there is a risk that the processing load will increase when reading signals input to multiple input ports.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an increase in processing load .

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
An opening and closing body that can be opened and closed,
An opening / closing detecting means for detecting the state of the opening / closing body,
A first operation detecting means capable of detecting a first operation,
A second operation detecting means capable of detecting a second operation,
It is capable of inputting signals and is provided with a control means having a plurality of input ports including a specific input port and other input ports.
The detection signal of the open / close detection means, the detection signal of the first operation detection means, and the detection signal of the second operation detection means are input to the specific input port among the plurality of input ports.
The control means is
A setting means capable of setting a set value when the detection signal of the open / close detection means, the detection signal of the first operation detection means, and the detection signal of the second operation detection means are in a specific input state.
Includes a game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value.
The signals input to the other input ports are more positive logic signals that are determined to be on when they are at high level, and the signals input to the specific input port are low level. There are more negative logic signals that are sometimes determined to be on,
The detection signal of the first operation detecting means and the detection signal of the second operation detecting means are signals having different logics.
The control means includes a control board.
The second operation detecting means is provided on the control board and is provided on the control board.
The open / close detecting means is provided on the open / close body and is provided on the open / close body.
In the control board, the transmission line of the detection signal of the second operation detection means and the transmission line of the detection signal of the open / close detection means merge.
The control means includes an initialization means that performs an initialization process based on the input of a detection signal of the first operation detection means.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load.
(1) Further, the gaming machine according to another aspect is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed in an advantageous state, and
A title notification means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect is provided.
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F).

According to such a configuration, the staging effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect.
In the plurality of types of the suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be feasible in a common manner (for example, FIG. 9C).

With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
At a plurality of execution timings during the execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a preview effect) suggesting that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least the first suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. It is possible and
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification means may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.

According to such a configuration, the title can be notified according to the suggestion effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.

According to such a configuration, the staging effect is improved.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
The suggestion effect execution means may enable the suggestion effect to be executed in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, the staging effect is improved.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
Detection means that can detect the movement of the player (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B), and
Further, a specific display executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) for performing a specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means is further provided.
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. It is possible and
During the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 17 (E) and 18 (I)).
During the valid period of detection by the detection means, the operation effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 18J and 18K).

According to such a configuration, the staging effect is improved.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, the first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display by the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A). Etc.) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (second size reach title image 31AK062 or the like displayed at the time of reaching title production shown in FIG. 19 (d)) (for example, an image). A display device 5 and a CPU 120 for effect control) are further provided.
The display means is
Multiple types of elements with different embodiments (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (fruit pattern, etc. shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) composed of the above.
When either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display is displayed in the pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Display so that elements E1 to E5 are included in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D).

According to such a configuration, a specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in the state where the frame for the gaming machine is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 121IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 121IW. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation processing and setting change processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process which is executed at the time of power-on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the staging control main process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial roll determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the look-ahead zone effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table before a game. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the super reach type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the icon pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the icon pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect determination process during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table during a game. It is a flowchart which shows the staging process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the staging process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing during a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table, the character effect effect decision table, and the light guide plate effect decision table in a big hit. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end effect process (step S175). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production stage determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect mode when the effect stage is changed after the end of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect mode when the effect stage is changed after the end of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect. The production mode of the suggestion effect during reach will be described. The production mode of the suggestion effect during reach will be described. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a gaming machine in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko gaming machine in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern setting process in the modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process in the modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the suggestion effect determination table after a small hit. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a magnetic detector, a setting board and a main board. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the structure of a magnetic detector. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the structure of a magnetic detector. It is explanatory drawing explaining the function of the input / output terminal of a magnetic detector. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control composition of a control part. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 136IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 136IW. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the detection of a magnetic change by a magnetic detector and various signals. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 149IW. It is a block diagram which shows the connection example of each detection means in a feature part 149IW, and a main board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the bit allocation of the input port in the microcomputer for game control.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area by a hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained and a big hit type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. The reach production includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,") which is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit middle effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) gives a staging control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including the jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The staging control board 12 is equipped with a staging control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the staging control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Upon receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying, for example, that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (details are provided). See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead judgment, etc. is made to the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the staging control board 12. In the staging control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this big hit end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state. It includes processing to make various settings for starting control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the staging control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the staging control board 12 will be described. In the staging control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the staging control CPU 120 is activated to execute the staging control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the staging control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various staging devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the staging operation using various staging devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the staging control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the staging control process process in step S76, the staging random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the staging random numbers used on the side of the staging control board 12 is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illuminated signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The big hit middle effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the big hit production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is “loss”. , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the display result is "missing". The variation pattern of reach loss is PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the display result is "big hit". The fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super reach B <The order is higher in the order of Super Reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8A and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 8A shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8B, the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title is notified by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the expectation of the player can be effectively fueled, and the staging effect is improved. The mode of notifying the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic typeface, Mincho typeface, etc.) and typeface (line book, regular script, etc.) of the title character may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of staging operation of feature unit 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following staging operation is executed by the staging control CPU 120 executing the staging control process process based on the staging control command transmitted from the main board 11. 9 and 10 are diagrams showing an example of the super reach effect operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. .. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” are stopped to enter the reach mode. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the entire screen of the image display device 5 is as shown in FIG. 9 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, the character 31AK003 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production. In the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When displaying the dialogue on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the voice corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B (here) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9 (F). Then, the character "SP reach B") is displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is notified. To. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9 (G), the character 31AK006 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

Further, in Super Reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (FIG. 9 (C) → (F) → (G) ...), the title is In the introduction part until the notification is made, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is announced, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made into a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. You may do it. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to specify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of super reach D, as shown in FIG. 9 (H), the title 31AK007 of super reach D (here, the character “SP reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "defeat the enemy") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach D is notified. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the reliability of the big hit of reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during the reach production. Although FIG. 9 (I) shows the same effect contents as those in FIG. 9 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to Super Reach D may be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 9 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is executed. To.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to displaying the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 9 (D), (F), (Fig. 9). H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. Even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production, and in the case of a reach with a low jackpot reliability, the super is announced. The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach production.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, or the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of differentiating the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily different according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different or the display place may be different as in this embodiment.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is not displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation degree suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 9 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, and corresponds to the expectation degree. The numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9H or the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of stages of expectation may be increased.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in any case because the effect of the effect can be improved.

Although the effect of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a determination effect of displaying the image 31AK012 on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10 (C), and the big hit combination is displayed as shown in FIG. 10 (D). A definite decorative pattern is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified even during the reach production, the notification of the title is terminated before the determined production is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the deciding effect, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to execute the variable display, but the reach effect is in progress. The method of displaying the decorative pattern of is arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 5 displays the hold display, the active display, the character resident during the variable display, and the display related to the mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of the super reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to pay attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 11 (B) shows. As shown, the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of Super Reach B is notified and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source can be switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach the development has occurred. As shown in FIG. 11, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing the title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. You may do so. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the staging operation example shown in FIG. 9 (H), the black star indicating the expectation degree was displayed from the beginning on the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008, but five white stars were displayed first and gradually. It is also possible to execute the expectation degree suggestion effect that suggests the expectation degree by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK0221. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white stars of. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 12 (D) and 12 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 12F, the black stars are highlighted as if they shine. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion production has ended.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, the black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree suggestion display is increased by one step, but two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. Alternatively, a half black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output in some cases. By doing so, the expected degree suggestion effect becomes various and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of steps of expectation that increases at one time, the same black star image is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, characters, motifs, sounds output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

12 (G) to 12 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect mode. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 12 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK024. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white rhombuses. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12 (J) and 12 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 12 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 12 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). ) May be different. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution ratio of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute the effect according to the player's preference and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation degree suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation degree of the expectation degree suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation degree. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. 13 (B), a button is displayed on the image display device 5. The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the character "SP reach C") is displayed, so that the super reach C is displayed. The title of reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source can be switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach the development has occurred. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the notification mode of the title (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is notified. After that, as shown in FIG. 14B, the title notice that the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. In this way, if the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and if the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 14, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the advance notice effect or the development effect, which is controlled by the jackpot advantageous state and improves the expectation. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of a fluctuation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “missing”. As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the title of Super Reach changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Things that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 14, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the display period of the title differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the change timing may be determined to be one of them. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or smaller than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16 (A) in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. 16 (B) is used in the special mode. Determine the title display color at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode of the character's line (for example, the display color of the line) in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “missing”. As shown in FIG. 16C, the display color of the dialogue in the reach production is provided to change from "white", "red", and "white" to "red", and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. For those whose display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode for other advance notice effects are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be feasible. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, but the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of feasible production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes more diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible staging modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible staging modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a unified notice effect, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or the title notice and the title notice may be different. The ratio of which effect mode changes (the ratio of which action) may be different from the dialogue notice, or the ratio of how many colors (steps) change may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one of the title and the dialogue is produced (display color) according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above-mentioned feature unit 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 5, a sub-liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal display here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. In this case, after the title is notified on the image display device 5, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. By doing so, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation degree suggestion display become easy to understand.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a advance notice effect (for example, a look-ahead advance notice effect), when a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different in the image display device 5 is executed, the shifted zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Use the stick controller to annihilate the enemy", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification example 1 of the feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). FIGS. 10 (B) to 10 (D)). Instead of such a determination effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

17 and 18 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17A, after the image display device 5 is in the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17B, the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character 31AK042 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 (C) to 17 (F) and FIGS. 18 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 changes to the large button image 31AK047. Changes to.

After that, as shown in FIG. 18 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 to be performed is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before a predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 18 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 18 (K). , A display prompting the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation to the stick controller 31A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, the image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 18 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation validity period, the image shown in FIG. 18 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and when an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability of is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so the effect is improved and the player's expectation is raised. Can be maintained.

Although the reach title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display are omitted in the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, they are appropriately performed in parallel with the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. 17 and 18. It may be executed. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, operation effect image to be displayed, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Variation example 2 of the feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red letters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits a notification. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 19 is a display screen view when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 19 (b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 19 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 19D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19 (e) is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters "Battle win!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 include all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image and are displayed. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. This makes it possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 15 together with the decision related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation of feature section 121IW)
Next, the feature unit 121IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-1 and 20-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 121IW001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board constituting the gaming board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 121IW003 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 121IW003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 121IW003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 121IW003 with the left side as the center and the door closing position where the front surface is closed. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 121IW003a, and when the glass door frame 121IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the game machine frame 121IW003 and the glass can be opened by players other than the clerk. The door frame 121IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 121IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, a setting key 121IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting change state are changed. A setting changeover switch 121IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switching main body unit provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052, is housed in the board case 121IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the board case 121IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 121IW201.

Since the board case 121IW201 having the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be performed when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key 121IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the setting key 121IW051. Further, the setting key 121IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the feature unit 121IW, the form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but one key may be used in combination.

Further, the board case 121IW201 is provided with a display monitor 121IW029 and a display changeover switch 121IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 121IW029. The display monitor 121IW029 and the display changeover switch 121IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and are arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 121IW201. That is, the display monitor 121IW029 and the display changeover switch 121IW030 are arranged in front of the board case 121IW201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is not opened, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 in the feature unit 121IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the feature unit 121IW, as shown in FIGS. 20-2 and 20-3, the right end portion of the outer frame 121IW001a includes a setting key 121IW051 and a setting changeover switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. A security cover 121IW500A that covers the right side of the board case 121IW201 from the back side is attached. The curity cover 121IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 121IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 121IW500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 121IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 121IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 121IW201. Further, the security cover 121IW500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 121IW001a via the front end portion of the short piece 121IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 20-2, the long piece 121IW500Ab abuts (or is close to) the right portion of the board case 121IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. Thereby, the right side portion of the board case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are inoperable by the long piece 121IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-3, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 121IW003 from the long piece 121IW500Ab. By separating the pieces, the covering state of the long piece 121IW500Ab is released, and the operation becomes operable.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 121IW, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the security cover 121IW500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052. While the state is maintained, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open, the above-mentioned restricted state by the security cover 121IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is permitted. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 121IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. The set value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 121IW051 or the setting changeover switch 121IW052 unless the clerk of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 121IW003 with the door key.

However, even if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) in the game field, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A setting key 121IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate from between a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the pachinko gaming machines 1 and the pachinko gaming machine 1. And the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may cause fraudulent acts such as changing the setting value. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the security cover 121IW500A switches the setting with the setting key 121IW051. By maintaining the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 121IW052 is regulated, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the board case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is covered by the security cover 121IW500A, the substrate is passed through the transparent security cover 121IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 121IW201 can be seen through, the status of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted, the sealing seal, and the like can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

In the feature unit 121IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-4 and 20-5, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for making various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), the display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), and FIG. 20. In addition to the display result judgment table (set value 3) shown in -4 (C) and the big hit type judgment table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown) and the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table ( (Not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20-6, a normal map display result determination table (not shown), a normal map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 121IW has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the lowest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 to increase the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the larger the value is in the order of 2 or 3, the higher the advantage is. In this feature unit 121IW, the winning probability of a small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
20-4 (A) to 20-4 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a large hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) than when the set values are "2" and "3". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability (1/2) is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. You are supposed to win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change) than in a certain case. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/300 for non-probability change, 1/30 for probability change). do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the set value. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" or "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change) than the case of "2". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/280 for non-probability change, 1/28 for probability change). do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the set value. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" or "2".

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to 20-4 (C). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to 20-4 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but stop at the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, the case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as in the case of the big hit winning probability, the small hit winning probability may be increased as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be set to the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "1" is 1/100, the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "2" is designed to be 1 / 93.75. The winning probability of a small hit at the set value "3" may be set to 1 / 87.5.

Further, in a gaming machine without a small hit, the configuration shown by the feature unit 121IW may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 121IW, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to 20-4 (C). A big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the big hit judgment is made depending on whether the first special symbol is variable display or the second special symbol variable display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using a separate table for the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first and the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the second.

Further, in the present feature unit 121IW, the case where the advantage is increased in the order of the set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3" is shown. May be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability / high base state, maintains a high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs, and is configured to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this example, as shown in Fig. 20-4, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is generated with a high probability of 1/2 and a prize ball is easily obtained. In a specific gaming state (high probability / high base state in this example), unlike other gaming states, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is likely to continue). The value "1" may be set to have the highest advantage.

Further, for example, the same probability change is applied to a gaming machine in which the probability change state ends based on the execution of the variation display of a predetermined number of times (probability change end number) after being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state). If it is the number of ends, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) may be increased in the order of the set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3".

In the feature unit 121IW, a total of three setting values of 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 20-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the feature unit 121IW, the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed). A common jackpot type determination table is used when determining the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning in the second start winning slot (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. A table referenced to determine one.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), the determination values corresponding to the random numbers (MR2) for determining the jackpot type are assigned to each set value, but they are assigned to simplify the explanation. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. That is, the ratio of which of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C is determined for each set value is shown. The loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-7, which will be described later, are also actually assigned determination values corresponding to random numbers. To simplify, the percentage of assigned determination values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is "2". When the rate determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is "3", the determination value is assigned so that the rate determined for the jackpot type A is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature section 121IW will be described with reference to FIG. 20-5 (B). In the feature section 121IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been done.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the staging control board 12, the start of the jackpot gaming state is started. This is the period during which the fanfare effect as the effect action to be notified is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period during which the big hit opening post-processing of step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the round in which the big winning opening is opened on the staging control board 12 side is completed, the next This is the period during which the interval effect is executed as the effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period to be done.

As shown in FIG. 20-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, then the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the feature unit 121IW, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to be the jackpot type C is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the ratio of being determined to be the jackpot type A is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 121IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit increases in the order of "1" <"2" <" 3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling can be achieved. Can be prevented from becoming too high.

This feature unit 121IW is configured to be able to execute a jackpot suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a jackpot game, and this jackpot suggestion effect is used for a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. In addition, by directing the player's attention to the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly performed.

Further, in the feature unit 121IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot can be hit. When the winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the setting is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which the relatively long period is set increases in the order of the jackpot type A <B <C is used. This makes it possible to increase the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

In the feature unit 121IW, in any of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are characterized by a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 121IW). The game ends when the figure game is executed or when the game is in a big hit game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time reduction control and probability variation control is different for each big hit type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state. The feature unit 121IW is configured so that the ratio of big hits differs for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability change continues for each set value. The rate (consecutive villa rate) may be different.

Further, in this feature unit 121IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and the probability change control, the number of controls, etc.) between the big hit type A to the big hit type C, and the fanfare period and the interval. It is configured so that the average period of the period and the ending period is different. You may do so. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

It should be noted that the feature unit 121IW exemplifies a form in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined at a different ratio from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value set, one of the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C cannot be determined. There may be more than one. In other words, if the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. Includes determining by percentage.

Further, in this feature unit 121IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are different depending on the jackpot type is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending are not limited to the jackpot type. It may be configured to have different periods. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to any of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, a lottery process with a selection probability according to the set value is performed according to any of the set values "1" to "3", and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. You may.

In this way, in this feature unit 121IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

In the feature unit 121IW, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

Further, in the feature unit 121IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability and the small hit probability increase, and the jackpot type C as the jackpot type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 121IW exemplifies a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs depending on the type of big hit. When the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3 as the property (so-called V probability variation type), the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the high base is medium (time reduction control). In (middle), the game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) may be set in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

Further, in this way, when the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is passed through the effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time, and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). It may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to a probabilistic state or a jackpot gaming state based on passing through the count switch).

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIG. 20-5 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIGS. 20-5 (C), the feature unit 121IW is provided with small hit types A to C as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 20-5 (C), in the feature unit 121IW, the determination ratios of the small hit types A to C are the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "3".

Further, in the feature unit 121IW, the opening period and the number of opening times of the large winning opening during the small hit game are the same regardless of which of the small hit types A to C, and the degree of advantage in the game is the same. ..

(Variation pattern judgment table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". The small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table used when is pre-determined and the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss" are prepared in advance. ..

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss variation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 121IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed at the time of turning on the power until the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) and the other period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period). Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and is configured to use different loss fluctuation pattern determination tables.

Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 20-6 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 121IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed at the time of turning on the power to the time when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) is set as a special period, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be set by using a real-time clock or the like as long as it is in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). In addition, the period until the first big hit may occur may be a special period.

In the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and 20-6, normal reach loss and super reach loss are obtained in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, so that the set value is suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

Further, the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), and is a set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution in the special period than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that the motive for playing the game in the special period is Can be given, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced.

For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern among them) is determined at the same ratio regardless of the difference in the set value (or the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do so. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

Further, the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and 20-6 (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss at times other than non-reach loss, depending on the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), the ratio of normal reach loss increases remarkably in the order of set values "1" <"2" <" 3" (this example). Then, it increases by 5%). Specifically, in the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), the normal reach loss is in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". It is configured so that the ratio of is slightly higher (in this example, it is increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. In addition, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

In this feature unit 121IW, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value, but this depends on the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss as a whole depending on the set value. It is a concept that includes that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that the execution ratio of only normal reach loss is different depending on the set value.

The feature unit 121IW displays a common background image on the image display device 5 regardless of which of the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and 20-6 (B) is used. Then, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the set value is set to any of 1 to 3, the image display device 5 displays a common background image and displays the decorative pattern in a variable manner. It should be noted that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment during the special period or the period from the time when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature unit 121IW. (Selected only in) may be provided so that the special variation pattern can be selected only in a special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 121IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are provided, and when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be one of non-reach loss A to C. It is configured in. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 may include non-reach loss A to C, and any of non-reach loss A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss. It may be configured to determine.

As shown in FIG. 20-7, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is "2". When the value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Judgment value is assigned to.

In the feature unit 121IW, when the set value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 121IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit increases in the order of "1" <"2" <" 3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured so that the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

The feature unit 121IW is configured to have different average fluctuation times by differentiating the ratio of non-reach loss A to C having different fluctuation times depending on the set value. For example, non-reach loss A to C. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the fluctuation time is different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. When multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the fluctuation time is different, the time of the decorative pattern shaking display and the high-speed fluctuation display may be different to produce the effect. It is desirable that there is no difference in the appearance.

Further, the feature unit 121IW is configured so that the average fluctuation time differs depending on the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, a fixed decorative pattern (final) The period during which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the period during which the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. , It is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, in the feature unit 121IW, the fluctuation time is set for each of the non-reach loss A to C, and the ratio of which of the non-reach loss A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration. Is fixedly set, and the setting in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is high may make the fluctuation time longer.

The feature portion 121IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening the variation time as compared with other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds), which is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds), is provided. The variation pattern for shortening is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is eliminated and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is the purpose. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in the feature unit 121IW, the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature unit 121IW, the variation time may be different depending on the set value for the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 121IW will be described. 20-8 and 20-9 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the feature unit 121IW. In the feature unit 121IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the staging control means to start for measuring the time until the staging control means (specifically, the staging control CPU 120) starts when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Set the timer (step 121IWS003). In this case, the effect control means activation wait timer is set with a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the activation of the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 121IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 121IWS005). If the value of the effect control means start wait timer is not 0, the process returns to step 121IWS004 and the processes of steps 121IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 121IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS003 to S005, the processes after step 121IWS006 are executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 starts, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM initialization and recovery processes are executed. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization specification command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are sent before the staging control CPU 120 starts, and the command may be missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 clears, for example, a factory-factory setting flag indicating that the RAM 102 has the factory-factory setting (for example, this flag is cleared even if the RAM clear processes 1 and 2 and the recovery process described later are executed. (Cleared when the setting change process described later is executed) is set so that it is not set, and in step 121IWS006, it is confirmed whether or not this factory setting flag is set. do it. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, a value indicating that the factory setting value is left as it is (for example, "0" or "-") is set as a set value, and the value of the set value is set in step 121IWS006. May be checked to see if it remains at the factory value. If the factory setting remains the same (step 121IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

If it is not the factory setting (step 121IWS006; Yes), that is, if the set value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is stored (step 121IWS007). Specifically, in step 121IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 121IWS008). In step 121 IWS008, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 121IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 121IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is being changed is set (step 121IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 121IWS009; No), that is, if a power failure occurs during the change of the setting value and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

In step 121IWS010, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 121IWS010). The CPU 103 may control the display monitor 121IW029 to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating that a RAM error has occurred.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS011). If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS012). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 121IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process (step 121IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the performance display such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is cleared. Information is not cleared and is retained. Further, in the RAM clear 1 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS027.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is off (N in step 121IWS011), when the setting key 121IW051 is off (N in step 121IWS012), or when the output signal from the clear switch is off (N in step 121IWS012). In step 121IWS013 N), the process does not shift to step 121IWS014, but shifts to loop processing.

When the processing of steps 121IWS006 to S014 is executed, the backup RAM is not normal in the feature unit 121IW (N in steps 121IWS007, S008), or the factory setting remains as it is (step 121IWS007, S008). In the case of 121IWS006 Y), if a power failure occurs during the setting change (Y in step 121IWS009), the setting key 121IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 121IW003 open. The RAM is cleared on condition that the setting value can be changed after step 121 IWS027. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened and the setting key 121IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and the gaming control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 121IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 121IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS016). If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS017). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing start command indicating that the setting confirmation processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS018).

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation process start command, it controls to notify that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or a decorative illuminant such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner). In this case, the effect control board 12 may be configured to display "maintenance mode" or the like and shift to the maintenance mode by pressing an operation button for effect such as the push button 31B. "Maintenance mode" is, for example, real-time clock date and time setting, error occurrence history (recording when and what kind of error occurred), setting change history (when the set value was changed or after the change). This mode allows you to check the recording of the set value). When the setting key 121IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also terminated.

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019).

When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 121IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped by the same process as in step S6. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing end command indicating that the setting confirmation processing is completed to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is not on (N in step 121IWS016) or when the setting key 121IW051 is not on (N in step 121IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S6. (Step 121 IWS022) is performed to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 by the same process as in step S7 (step 121IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 121IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the ratio and the connection ratio are cleared. Information for performance display such as role ratio and base, and information on set values are not cleared and are retained.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS025). If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS026). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets the setting changing flag (step 121IWS027).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change processing start command indicating that the setting change processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS028). When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting change processing start command, it controls to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or a decorative illuminant such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process (step 121IWS029).

When the setting change process is completed, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 121IWS030). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS031). Further, a setting change processing end command indicating that the setting change processing is completed is transmitted to the staging control board 12 (step 121IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is not on (N in step 121IWS025) or when the setting key 121IW051 is not on (N in step 121IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S9. Therefore, an effect control command instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

In the feature unit 121IW, the processing of steps IWS034 to S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

Next, the setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019) will be described. FIG. 20-10 (A) is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019).

In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSA01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWSA02). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSA03). If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 121IWSA02, and the processes of steps 121IWSA02 to SA03 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 121IW051 is on, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029.

If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation error processing (step 121IWSA04). Then, after that, it shifts to the loop processing. In step 121IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 may send a command indicating that a setting confirmation error is performed, and execute the setting confirmation error notification based on the reception of the command on the staging control CPU 120 side. good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by lighting an error LED on a board on which the gaming machine is mounted. Further, in this example, when the setting confirmation error processing is executed, the process shifts to the loop processing, and then the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the processing does not proceed.

If the setting key 121IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSA05). If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is on, the process of step 121IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation process is terminated.

Next, the setting change process (step 121IWS029) will be described. FIG. 20-10 (B) is a flowchart showing a setting change process (step 121IWS029).

In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSB01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is on (step 121IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is not on, the process proceeds to step 121IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is ON (Y in step 121IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the setting value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSB03). For example, when "1" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 121IW029, the display of the display monitor 121IW029 is updated and displayed as "2", and "2" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 121IW029. The display of the display monitor 121IW029 may be updated to "3", and when "3" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 121IW029, the display of the display monitor 121IW029 may be updated to "1". Further, the CPU 103 stores the set value (updated set value) displayed on the display monitor 121IW0029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updated and stored with respect to the already stored set value) (step 121IWSB04).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWSB05). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSB06). If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 121IWSB02, and the processes of steps 121IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 121IW051 is on, the processes of steps 121IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed.

If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes the setting change error processing (step 121IWSB07). Then, after that, it shifts to the loop processing. In step 121IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating a setting change error and execute the setting change error notification based on the reception of the command on the staging control CPU 120 side. good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by lighting an error LED on a board on which the gaming machine is mounted. Further, in this example, when the setting change error processing is executed, the process shifts to the loop processing, and then the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the processing does not proceed. In this case, since the setting changing flag is still set in step 121IWS027, the RAM clear 1 process is executed after the power is turned on again (see Y and 121IWS014 in step 121IWS009). The error state will be cleared.

If the setting key 121IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSB08). If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is on, the process of step 121IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

FIG. 20-11 is an explanatory diagram showing a process executed when the power is turned on. In this feature unit 121IW, as shown in FIG. 20-11, when the setting key 121IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (furthermore, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting change process (step 121IWS029) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (step 121IWS015 to S017) is executed. If the setting key 121IW051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the recovery process (step S6) is executed if the clear switch is off. Will be executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-12 (A) and 20-12 (B), when the power is turned off (power cut off) by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 121IW029 ends. If the large winning opening is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing when the power is turned off, the large winning opening is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (C), when the clerk of the game hall or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 121IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting value is set to, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (D), the CPU 103 each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 121IW052 by a clerk of the amusement park or the like is detected. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is operated, it is updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ...). Further, the set value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (E), the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 121IW029 based on the fact that the setting key 121IW051 is turned off by the operation of the clerk of the game hall or the like. Notifies the store clerk of the above that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

If the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 20-12 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear process is executed when the setting is changed. As the memory of the jackpot is erased, the jackpot remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process, and is in a state where the game can be played, that is, a state in which the fluctuation display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the fluctuation pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change process in the feature unit 121IW, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. As the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value most disadvantageous to the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 121IW) or the most advantageous to the player. The set value (“3” in the case of the feature unit 121IW) may be displayed.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-12, the case where the set value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display of the display monitor 121IW029 when the set value is confirmed or changed is shown. The set value may be displayed by using, for example, the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 121IW029. Further, for example, the display monitor 121IW029 may be configured to display the set value by performing a dedicated 4-digit display. In this case, for example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 121IW029 displays four digits of "-S-1", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 121IW029 displays "-S-2". 4 digits may be displayed, or if the set value is “3”, the 4 digits of “−S-3” may be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029. Further, for example, the set value may be displayed on all four-digit displays of the display monitor 121IW029. For example, if the setting value is "1", the display monitor 121IW029 displays the four digits of "1111", and if the setting value is "2", the display monitor 121IW029 displays the four digits of "2222". You may.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the feature unit 121IW will be described. 20-13 and 20-14 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved storage number (total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) (step 121IWS101). For example, check the count value of the total pending storage counter for counting the total pending storage.

If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 121IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed on the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed on the second special symbol). The data indicating "second" is set in (step 121IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 121IWS104).

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS102 to S104, in the feature unit 121IW, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed according to the starting winning order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. And may be configured to execute.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 121IWS105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 121IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and determines each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or). The order of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is decremented by 1 (step 121IWS107). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS108). As described above, in the feature unit 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed at the time of turning on the power by executing the process of step 121IWS031, but the step is also performed after the power is turned on. By executing the process of 121IWS108, the set value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started.

Even if the same fluctuation pattern is used, if different fluctuation pattern commands are sent for each set value, the fluctuation pattern commands for the total number of fluctuation patterns x the number of set values (3 in this example) are required. Therefore, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, the set value command may be transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and the variation pattern command corresponding to the specific variation pattern may be provided with the variation pattern command corresponding to the set value. good. In this case, for example, the set value command is sent only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern command for the number of set values. May be provided.

Further, in this example, the case where the same setting value command is transmitted by the setting value command (see step 121IWS031) transmitted at the time of turning on the power and the setting value command (see step 121IWS108) transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown. It is not limited to any mode. For example, the setting value command for turning on the power and the setting value command for starting the fluctuation may be configured as separate commands, and different setting value commands may be sent at the time of turning on the power and at the starting of the fluctuation. good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to send the staging control command that is used as both the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. May be good. In this case, for example, even if the fluctuation pattern command specifies the same fluctuation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and if the set value is "3", the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 side is configured depending on which set value is used. It may be configured so that which fluctuation pattern is selected and the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the fluctuation pattern A-2 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-2 is high. It may be selected by a ratio, or if the set value is 3, the fluctuation pattern A-3 may be selected or the fluctuation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high ratio. In this case, for example, the fluctuation patterns A-1 to A-3 may be configured so that the fluctuation time is the same, but the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, the number of pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of reach, and the type are different. Further, in this case, for example, when the setting value command is not received normally, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the setting value command is not received normally, the dedicated selection ratio is selected. It may be configured to select a fluctuation pattern with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current gaming state (step 121IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 controls to send a probabilistic state background specification command when it is in a probabilistic state, and controls to send a time saving state background specification command when it is in a time saving state, which is a normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background specification command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (see FIG. 20-4) with a random number value MR1, and if they match, a process of deciding to make a big hit or a small hit is performed. It is a program to be executed. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 121IWS110), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 121IWS111). Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step 121IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 121IWS112), and proceeds to step 121IWS116.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step 121IWS111), that is, if the value is out of the range, the process proceeds to step 121IWS116 as it is.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the big hit determination values (Y in step 121IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 20-5) to match the type corresponding to the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A”). , "Big hit type B" or "Big hit type C") is determined as the big hit type (step 121IWS114).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS115). For example, when the jackpot type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 121IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an outlier symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the jackpot flag is set, "7", which is the jackpot symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, it may be determined to be a different special symbol stop symbol depending on the jackpot type. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5", which is the small hit symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 121IWS117).

(Production mode change process)
Next, the operation of the staging control means in the feature unit 121IW will be described. FIG. 20-15 is a flowchart showing a part of the staging control main process in the feature unit 121IW. In the feature unit 121IW, in the staging control main process, the staging control CPU 120 executes the staging mode change process for changing the staging mode when the staging control random number update process in step S77 is executed (step 121IWS201), and then. The process returns to step S73.

The feature unit 121IW can control three types of effect modes, effect mode A to effect mode C, and for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. The types of characters that appear in the advance notice and reach effects are different. In the effect mode change process of step 121 IWS 201, the effect control CPU 120 controls to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the real-time clock is mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect mode may be changed based on the predetermined date and time based on the date and time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 121IW201, when the effect mode is changed, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, set a flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change and reset the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change. For example, when the effect mode A is changed, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode B is changed, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to the effect mode C, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

The method of changing the staging mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as staging mode A → staging mode B → staging mode C → staging mode A → ... It may be changed at random from modes A to C.

(Command analysis processing)

20-16 to 20-18 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 121IWS301). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 121IWS302). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 121IWS303). The reason for +2 is to read 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 121IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 121IWS305). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (step 121IWS306).

Since the RAM 122 mounted on the staging control board 12 is not backed up by the power supply in the feature unit 121IW, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area supply power to the gaming machine. Is cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, and the process is started with the set value command reception flag cleared. To. Since the effect control board 12 is started in a state where the set value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command even when the setting confirmation process or the recovery process is executed. It may be configured so that the set value command is always sent when the power is turned on.

In addition, in this feature unit 121IW, the set value command is sent when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting change process is performed, but the set value command is normal due to missing commands or garbled data. If the data cannot be received, the process of step 121IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this feature unit 121IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each fluctuation display, so that the process of step 121IWS305 is performed based on the set value command received thereafter. It is executed and the setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

Further, even if the setting value command is received, the setting value included in the setting value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when reading the setting value command on the effect control CPU 120 side, the setting value command is used. It may be configured to determine whether or not the included set value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the set value is configured to be set to any of "1" to "3", but includes values such as "5" and "10" that should not be set. If so, it may be configured to determine that the setting value included in the setting value command is abnormal. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 side stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and then when a new set value command is received, the newly received set value command is used. If the set value shown does not match the set value stored last time, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and it may be determined that the setting value is abnormal. Even if it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command has not been received normally, and the effect is restricted according to the processing method shown by the feature unit 121IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial roll setting)
When the effect control board 12 side receives any of the initialization designation command, the recovery command, the setting change processing end command, and the setting confirmation processing end command from the main board 11 in the command analysis process, the feature unit 121IW receives. , The image display device 5 controls to display a predetermined initial result (specifically, a combination of decorative symbols displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started). Perform (hereinafter, also referred to as initial roll production).

If the received effect control command is a setting change process end command (step 121IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS308). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, when the setting change process is executed and the setting value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value, the initial roll determination table is used to combine an even initial roll (for example, "246" or "224"), which is a combination of even decorative symbols, and an odd number of decorative symbols. It is determined to be one of an odd initial roll (for example, "135" or "113") and a special initial roll which is a combination of decorative symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) (step 121IWS309). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS314.

FIG. 20-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table. In step 121 IWS 309, using the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), a lottery process based on a random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the set value stored in the set value storage area, and the initial result is performed. Determine the outcome. In the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), the ratio of odd initial rolls determined is higher in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Therefore, if the odd initial roll is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, the setting value is advantageous as compared with the case where the setting has been changed and the even initial roll is displayed. It will be suggested that it is set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), the special initial result may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is "3". With such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game and to give a motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the staging control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 121IWS310). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial roll using the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A) assuming that the set value is "1" (step 121IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS314.

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS310 to S311, the feature unit 121IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. The initial roll is determined as "1". As shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), for the set value "1", the ratio of the odd initial roll is determined to be the lowest, and the special initial roll is not determined. By configuring in such a way, it is possible to reduce the situation where the odd initial roll or the special initial roll is displayed and the player is disappointed even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

If it is not the staging mode A, the staging control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current staging mode is the staging mode C (step 121IWS312). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result using the initial result determination table for the effect mode C (step 121IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS314.

FIG. 20-19 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-19 (B), in the initial roll determination table for the effect mode C, an odd initial roll is determined as compared with the case of the setting value “3” which is most advantageous for the player. The ratio is low, and it may not be determined as a special initial roll.

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS312 to S313, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 121IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. Despite this, the odd-numbered initial rolls and special initial rolls are displayed to reduce the situation in which the player is disappointed by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial result determined in steps 121IWS309, S311 and S313 (step 121IWS314).

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result to be an even initial number, and the image display device 5 In, control is performed to display even initial rolls (step 121IWS315).

By executing the process of step 121IWS315, the feature unit 121IW uniformly displays an even initial result when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the situation where an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed to disappoint the player even though an unfavorable setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. I have to.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the odd-numbered initial roll symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, an initial roll is used by using a table in which the determination ratio of the odd initial roll symbol is set lower than the set value "1" of the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A). It may be configured to determine the eye pattern.

In this example, the case where the even initial result is uniformly displayed when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode B is set is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the setting value command cannot be received normally, such as a combination of "???" symbols as the initial result in the effect mode B. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial roll. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest a set value in some form may be displayed as an initial result.

In addition, the processing when the setting value command cannot be received normally (or when the setting value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, when it is determined to be N in step 121IWS308, the set value "1" may be stored in the set value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value "4") indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial result. May be good.

If the received effect control command is either an initialization specification command, a recovery command, or a setting confirmation process end command (step 121IWS316), that is, if the setting change process is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 , The initial roll is determined to be an even initial roll, and the image display device 5 controls to display the even initial roll (step 121IWS317). In the feature unit 121IW, when the setting change process is not executed, the initial roll is determined as the even initial roll and is not determined as the odd initial roll, but the even initial roll is determined by lottery. It may be determined as either an eye or an odd initial result. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

If the received effect control command is a RAM error notification command (step 121IWS318), the effect control CPU 120 executes RAM error notification (step 121IWS319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as "RAM error error has occurred" in the image display device 5, or outputs a sound or an error sound indicating a RAM error error from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or, the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are controlled to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the RAM error abnormality notification is performed, the maximum volume sound or error sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are emitted with the maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full-color LED). Is white and emits light).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (effect control command for specifying the variation pattern) (step 121IWS320), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the RAM. Store in the area (step 121IWS321). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 121IWS322).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (effect control command for specifying whether or not to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, a big hit type, or a small hit type) (step 121IWS323), for effect control. The CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step 121IWS324).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation specification command (effect control command that specifies that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed) (step 121IWS325), the effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step 121IWS325). Step 121 IWS326).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (effect control command for designating the start of the jackpot game) (step 121IWS327), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 121IWS328).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (effect control command for designating the end of the jackpot game) (step 121IWS329), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 121IWS330).

Specify whether or not the received staging control command is a big hit determined in advance by the symbol specification command (starting prize judgment process (see step S101), whether or not it is a small hit, and the judgment result of the big hit type and the small hit type. If it is (step 121IWS331), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received symbol designation command in the first vacant storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step 121IWS331). Step 121 IWS332).

If the received effect control command is a variation category command (an effect control command that specifies a determination result of a variation category (variation pattern type or variation pattern) pre-read by the start winning determination process (see step S101)) (step 121IWS333). ), The effect control CPU 120 stores the received variable category command in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command is stored in each storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step). 121IWS334).

If the received effect control command is the first hold storage number addition designation command (step 121IWS335), the effect control CPU 120 inputs the received first hold storage number addition designation command to the start winning command formed in the RAM. It is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol specification command and variable category command are stored in each storage area of the storage area (step 121IWS336). Further, the effect control CPU 120 increases the hold display by one in the first hold storage display area of the image display device 5, and updates the first hold storage number display (step 121IWS337). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (step 121IWS338).

If the received effect control command is the second hold storage number addition designation command (step 121IWS339), the effect control CPU 120 inputs the received second hold storage number addition designation command to the start winning command formed in the RAM. It is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol specification command and variable category command are stored in each storage area of the storage area (step 121IWS340). Further, the effect control CPU 120 increases the hold display by one in the second hold storage display area of the image display device 5, and updates the second hold storage number display (step 121IWS341). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area (step 121IWS342).

If the received effect control command is the first hold storage number subtraction designation command (step 121IWS343), the effect control CPU 120 erases one hold display in the first hold storage display area of the image display device 5, and the rest. The hold display is shifted one by one to update the first hold storage number display (step 121IWS344). Further, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (step 121IWS345).

If the received effect control command is the second hold storage number subtraction designation command (step 121IWS346), the effect control CPU 120 erases one hold display in the second hold storage display area of the image display device 5, and the rest. The hold display is shifted one by one to update the second hold storage number display (step 121IWS347). Further, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area (step 121IWS348).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 121IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS 301.

The feature unit 121IW is configured so that the odd initial roll is not displayed when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on. However, even if the odd initial roll can be displayed. good. Further, also in this case, the ratio determined by the odd initial number may be different depending on the set value (that is, the setting value may be suggested).

Further, for example, instead of or in addition to an odd initial roll or an even initial roll, an initial roll that denies the possibility of a specific set value (for example, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied and is set. (It is determined that the value is 2 or the set value 3), an initial result that is determined to be a specific set value, or the like may be provided so as to be displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied when the specific initial result is displayed by preventing the determination of the specific initial result, and the set value 2 or It will be confirmed that the set value is 3. Further, for example, by setting a specific initial roll to be determined only in the case of the set value 3, when the specific initial roll is displayed, it is confirmed that the set value is 3. .. Further, at the time of determining the initial roll, one of these initial rolls may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the feature unit 121IW, the set value can be changed, and as the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value, the pre-game suggestion effect executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, and the game (for example, during the game). , The setting suggestion based on the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination tendency, and the jackpot suggestion effect executed during the jackpot (for example, during the jackpot game) can be executed. Has been done. In the feature unit 121IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of types of effect modes in which the reliability of the suggestion is different. The reliability of the suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> big hit suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect, or in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect> big hit medium suggestion effect. The reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect during the game, or the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the game. Further, the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect may be set to be configurable. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect or the initial appearance effect suggesting that the setting has been changed), or the execution ratio. It may be possible to change the setting so as to lower (or raise). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operation means such as the push button 31B or the operation means (operable only by the administrator) such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine. May be able to change.

(Read-ahead notice setting process)
In addition to the initial roll effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, and jackpot suggestion effect, the feature section 121IW has a look-ahead zone effect, reach-in-time suggestion effect, and effect stage as effects that can suggest set values. It is possible to perform the production by changing.

FIG. 20-20 is a flowchart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, the staging control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has been received (step 121IWS401). Specifically, one set of symbol specification command, variable category command, and hold storage number addition specification command (first hold storage number addition specification command or second hold storage number addition specification command) is displayed in the start winning command storage area. It can be confirmed by determining whether or not it is newly stored. If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If a new command for starting a set of winnings is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a new starting winning to the first starting winning opening has occurred (step 121IWS402). .. Whether or not the start winning to the first starting winning opening has occurred is specifically determined by whether or not the newly received hold storage number addition designation command is the first hold storage number addition designation command. It can be confirmed by determining whether or not. Unless the start winning to the first starting winning opening has occurred (that is, if the starting winning to the second starting winning opening has occurred), the process is terminated as it is.

When a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first reserved storage number is 2 or more (step 121IWS403). If the first reserved storage number is not 2 or more (that is, if the first reserved storage number is 1), the process is terminated as it is.

In this example, by executing the processes of steps IWS402 and S403, the look-ahead zone effect may be executed only when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed two or more times. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the look-ahead zone effect can be executed even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, or the look-ahead zone effect is executed even when the variable display is executed only once after the start winning prize. It may be configured as possible.

If the first reserved storage number is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the look-ahead zone effect execution flag indicating that the look-ahead zone effect is being executed is set (step 121IWS404). If the look-ahead zone effect executing flag is set (that is, if the look-ahead zone effect is already being executed), the process ends as it is. By executing the process of step 121 IWS404, in this example, when the look-ahead zone effect is already being executed, the look-ahead zone effect is not determined in duplicate.

If the read-ahead zone effect executing flag is not set (that is, unless the look-ahead zone effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 120 is the first of the symbol specification commands stored in the start winning command storage area. All the symbol designation commands (all symbol designation commands stored in association with the first reserved storage number addition designation command) based on the winning to the start winning opening are extracted (step 121IWS405).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not any of the extracted symbol designation commands indicates that the pre-reading determination result is a big hit (step 121 IWS406). If there is a big hit (that is, if there is a big hit in the first hold storage), the effect control CPU 120 is a look-ahead zone for the big hit as a table for determining the presence / absence of the look-ahead zone effect. Select the staging decision table (step 121IWS407). If there is no big hit (that is, if there is no big hit in the first hold storage), the effect control CPU 120 is a look-ahead zone for loss as a table for determining the presence / absence of the look-ahead zone effect. Select the staging decision table (step 121IWS408). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected look-ahead zone effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the look-ahead zone effect (step 121IWS409).

FIG. 20-21 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 20-21 (A) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect determination table for big hits. Further, FIG. 20-21 (B) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect determination table for out-of-order. As shown in FIG. 20-21, in this example, if there is a big hit in the first hold storage, it is decided to execute the look-ahead zone effect with a probability of 70%, and the first hold memory If there is no big hit, it is decided to execute the look-ahead zone effect with a probability of 1%.

In this example, the execution ratio of the look-ahead zone effect is different depending on whether it is a big hit or not, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the execution ratio of the look-ahead zone effect may be different depending on the presence / absence and type of super reach. Further, for example, the execution ratio of the look-ahead zone effect may be different depending on the presence or absence of pseudo-ream and the number of pseudo-ream.

When it is decided to execute the look-ahead zone effect (Y in step 121IWS410), the effect control CPU 120 sets the look-ahead zone effect executing flag (step 121IWS411). Further, the effect control CPU 120 clears the value of the look-ahead zone effect number counter for counting the number of executions of the look-ahead zone effect to 0 (step 121IWS412). The look-ahead zone effect executing flag set in step 121IWS411 is reset when a big hit occurs, and the look-ahead zone effect is ended. Further, in this example, when the big hit does not occur even if the fluctuation display is executed four times (when the value of the look-ahead zone effect count counter becomes 4), the fluctuation display is terminated. It is assumed that the look-ahead zone effect in progress flag is reset and the look-ahead zone effect is terminated.

By executing the above processing, the feature unit 121IW may decide to execute the look-ahead zone effect when a new start winning prize is generated. Then, when the execution of the look-ahead zone effect is decided, the look-ahead zone effect is started when the first variable display is started, and when a big hit occurs in the second to fourth variable display, the set value " It is suggested that it is "1" to "3".

In this example, the case where the presence / absence of the look-ahead zone effect is determined based on the look-ahead determination result indicated by the symbol designation command is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence of the look-ahead zone effect based on the look-ahead determination result (for example, whether or not the super reach is achieved) indicated by the variable category command.

Further, in this example, when the execution of the look-ahead zone effect is determined, the case where the look-ahead zone effect is started when the first variable display is uniformly started is shown, but only in such an aspect. I can't. For example, a plurality of timings may be provided as the start timing of the look-ahead zone effect. In this case, for example, when the execution of the look-ahead zone effect is determined in the look-ahead advance notice setting process, the start timing of the look-ahead zone effect is set to the first variation, the second variation, or the third variation. It may be determined and configured to start the look-ahead zone effect from the determined start timing.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 20-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the staging control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 121IWS501).

When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the effect waiting demo effect if it is being executed (step 121IWS502, step 121IWS503). Then, the variable pattern command reception flag is reset (step 121IWS504), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 121IWS505), and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

If the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition unless the customer waiting demo effect is being executed (N in step 121IWS506). (Step 121IWS507). In step 121IWS507, for example, when the timer set when the previous variable display (display result "loss") ends (for example, set in 30 seconds) times out, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, even when the timer is not set (that is, when the fluctuation display has not been executed even once after the power is turned on and before the start of the game), it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, when a predetermined period has elapsed without executing the variable display (and when the game is not controlled to the big hit game state), or when the game has not started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demo effect is produced by the process described later. Will be executed.

If the timing result by the timing means matches a predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 (step 121IWS508). That is, in step 121IWS508, it is confirmed whether the game has not started yet.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS509). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the mode of the effect when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed (step 121IWS510). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS515.

In the feature unit 121IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is changed to the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demo effect that is controlled and includes the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. The decorative lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color) when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the including aspect is executed.

FIG. 20-23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 121 IWS510, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of determination values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (A). Whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the mode of the effect are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 20-23 (A), determination values are assigned so that the rate at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Has been done. Further, the determination values are assigned so that the ratio determined in the second effect mode increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed, and that the pre-game suggestion effect is set to an advantageous setting value by being executed by the second effect mode rather than the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting was changed when the power was turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-23 (A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is "3".

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the staging control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 121IWS511). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the set value is "1", and whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (A). And the effect mode is determined (step 121IWS512). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS515.

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS511 to S512, the feature unit 121IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIG. 20-23 (A), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode is the lowest, and the third effect mode may not be determined. By making such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

If it is not the staging mode A, the staging control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current staging mode is the staging mode C (step 121IWS513). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 121IWS514). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS515.

FIG. 20-23 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-23 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined to execute the pre-game suggestion effect as compared with the case of the set values "2" and "3". The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined to be the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode may not be determined.

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS513 to S514, a disadvantageous set value is set in the feature unit 121IW when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player is reduced, and the deterioration of the interest in the game can be prevented.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the customer waiting demo effect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 121IWS510, S512, and S514 (step 121IWS515). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 121IWS516 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 121IWS513, the feature unit 121IW does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. Even though a disadvantageous setting value is set, the situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the player is disappointed is reduced, and the deterioration of the interest in the game can be prevented.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution rate of the pre-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (A), before the game is used. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and type of suggestive effect.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 20-23 (A), only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed so that the execution ratio differs depending on the set value. You may do it.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is 2 or 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific setting value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In the feature unit 121IW, the pre-game suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and first) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

The feature unit 121IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect if the setting is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not been received yet. Not limited to this, it may be possible to execute the pre-game suggestion effect even when the setting has not been changed. In this case, it may be possible to determine whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed at different ratios depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

For example, FIG. 20-23 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when a command at the time of restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (A) with the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change is made. When it is not performed, the rate at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed is lower than when the setting is changed, and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is also smaller. By doing so, it is possible to make the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect different depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 controls to execute the customer waiting demo effect including the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 121IWS516). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

When the process of step 121 IWS516 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, the execution history indicating the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (in-game suggestion effect or jackpot suggestion effect), the execution content (execution mode), and the like. A customer waiting demo effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 121IWS516 is executed, the customer waiting de-effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, the customer waiting de-effect is executed. The image display device 5 may display the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, the number of executions and the execution content (effect mode at the time of execution) of the setting suggestion effect (initial roll effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect, etc.) are shown. It may be possible to store the information and execute an effect of estimating the set value from the information and notifying the information. It should be noted that this effect notifies the setting expectation degree (or the estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined standard from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, and does not notify the actual setting value. ..

In the feature unit 121IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 121IWS508 to 121IWS515. Further, the process of step 121IWS516 shows the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect during the customer waiting demo effect, but the information about the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, it is possible to make an interest in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, to give an motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and to enhance the interest. .. Not limited to the example of the feature unit 121IW, for example, a real-time clock or the like is used so that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). May be good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include the information regarding the suggestion effect during the game in the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the feature unit 121IW, the number of executions and the execution contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and the image display device 5 displays a two-dimensional code including the execution history information at the end of the game. It may be configured to do so. Further, when the player takes a picture of the two-dimensional code displayed on the game machine using a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function and sends it to a Web server on the Internet, the Web server is based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of granting a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. Further, the player may access the Web server (or analyze the two-dimensional code) using the mobile terminal to acquire the execution history information and display it on the display device included in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information using the mobile terminal so that the setting suggestion image suggesting the setting value is displayed on the display device provided in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined standard is calculated from the execution history information, and a setting suggestion image suggesting the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. You may.

(Variable display start setting process)
20-24 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 121IWS601). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 121IWS601 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 121IWS602). That is, by executing the process of step 121IWS602 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 121IWS602, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 121 IWS602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols having the same odd-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. Further, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols having the same even-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. do.

When the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols of the small hit symbol according to the small hit type specified by the display result designation command. .. In this example, in the case of the small hit type A, the combination of "135" is determined as the small hit symbol, and in the case of the small hit type B, the combination of "357" is determined as the small hit symbol. In the case of type C, the combination of "579" is determined as the small hit symbol.

If the received display result specification command indicates an error, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined.

When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 has a chance symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 121IWS602. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the staging control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display started this time includes super reach (step 121IWS603). Specifically, whether or not the variation display includes the super reach can be determined by checking the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 121IWS601. If it is a variable display including super reach, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using a super reach type determination table for determining the type of super reach, and develops during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The type of super reach to be caused is determined (step 121IWS604).

FIG. 20-25 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the super reach type determination table. Of these, FIG. 20-25 (A) shows a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the set value is “1”. Further, FIG. 20-25 (B) shows a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the set value is “2”. Further, FIG. 20-25 (C) shows a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the set value is “3”.

In this example, when the super reach is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, it is possible to develop into four types of super reach, super reach A to D. In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-25 (A), when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining that the super reach B is executed is the highest. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-25 (B), when the set value is "2", the ratio of determining that the super reach C is executed is the highest. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-25 (C), when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining that the super reach D is executed is the highest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the icon pattern to be displayed during the super reach according to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 (step 121IWS605). In step 121 IWS605, the effect control CPU 120 selects an icon pattern determination table for determining an icon pattern according to a set value, and uses the selected icon pattern determination table to perform a lottery process based on a random number to perform an icon pattern. To decide.

20-26 and 20-27 are explanatory views showing specific examples of the icon pattern determination table. Of these, FIGS. 20-26 (A) show a specific example of the icon pattern determination table selected when the set value is “1”. Further, FIG. 20-26 (B) shows a specific example of the icon pattern determination table selected when the set value is “2”. Further, FIG. 20-27 (C) shows a specific example of the icon pattern determination table selected when the set value is “3”.

In this example, when the start timing of the super reach is reached during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the panel images A to D corresponding to each of the super reach A to D are overlapped with the panel image A corresponding to the super reach A at the beginning. It is displayed in. Then, according to the operation of the push button 31B by the player, the panel images corresponding to the super reach A are erased in order, and finally, the effect of developing into a kind of super reach corresponding to the panel image displayed at the top. Is executed.

In this example, when it is determined to execute Super Reach A, the panel image is not erased even if the push button 31B is operated, and the panel image corresponding to Super Reach A is displayed at the top. It does not change in the state. Further, when it is decided to execute Super Reach B, when the panel image corresponding to Super Reach B is displayed at the beginning, the panel image is deleted even if the push button 31B is further operated. However, the panel image corresponding to Super Reach B remains displayed at the beginning and does not change. Further, when it is decided to execute Super Reach C, when the panel image corresponding to Super Reach C is displayed at the beginning, the panel image is deleted even if the push button 31B is further operated. However, the panel image corresponding to Super Reach C remains displayed at the beginning and does not change.

Further, in this example, the icon image may be displayed on the panel images B to D corresponding to each of the super reach B to D, and finally depending on the icon image displayed on the panel image displayed at the beginning. By suggesting the current set value, the suggestion effect during reach is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 20-26 and 20-27, in this example, there are nine types of icon patterns 1 to 9. The icon pattern 1 is a pattern in which the icon image is not displayed in any of the panel images B to D. Therefore, the decision to use the icon pattern 1 means that the suggestion effect during reach is not executed. Further, the icon pattern 2 is a pattern in which the icon image "●" is displayed in any of the panel images B to D. Further, the icon pattern 3 is a pattern in which the icon image "●" is displayed on the panel images B to C and the icon image "▲" is displayed on the panel image D. Further, the icon pattern 4 is a pattern in which the icon image "●" is displayed on the panel image B and the icon image "▲" is displayed on the panel images C to D. Further, the icon pattern 5 is a pattern in which the icon image "●" is displayed on the panel image B, the icon image "▲" is displayed on the panel image C, and the icon image "★" is displayed on the panel image D. Further, the icon pattern 6 is a pattern in which the icon image “▲” is displayed in any of the panel images B to D. Further, the icon pattern 7 is a pattern in which the icon image "▲" is displayed on the panel images B to C and the icon image "★" is displayed on the panel image D. Further, the icon pattern 8 is a pattern in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image B and the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel images C to D. Further, the icon pattern 8 is a pattern in which the icon image “★” is displayed in any of the panel images B to D.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-26 (A), when the set value is "1", the selection ratios of the icon patterns 2 to 5 in which the icon image "●" is displayed on the panel image B are compared. Highly targeted (in the case of a big hit, it is selected with a total probability of 60%, and in the case of a miss, it is selected with a total probability of 50%). Therefore, in this example, since the execution rate of Super Reach B is high when the set value is "1", if the icon image "●" is finally displayed on the panel B displayed at the top. , The probability that the set value is "1" is high, and the set value "1" is suggested.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-26 (B), when the set value is “2”, the selection ratio of the icon patterns 4 to 7 in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image C. Is relatively high (in the case of a big hit, it is selected with a total probability of 60%, and in the case of a miss, it is selected with a total probability of 50%). Therefore, in this example, since the execution rate of Super Reach C is high when the set value is "2", if the icon image "▲" is finally displayed on the panel C displayed at the top. , The probability that the set value is "2" is high, and the set value "2" is suggested.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-27 (C), when the set value is “3”, the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel image D of the icon patterns 5, 7 to 9. The selection rate is relatively high (in the case of a big hit, it is selected with a total probability of 60%, and in the case of a miss, it is selected with a total probability of 50%). Therefore, in this example, since the execution rate of Super Reach D is high when the setting value is "3", if the icon image "★" is finally displayed on the panel D displayed at the top. , The probability that the set value is "3" is high, and the set value "3" is suggested.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-26 (A), when the icon pattern 2 is selected when the set value is "1", it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for a big hit with respect to the combination of a specific set value and the icon pattern (in this example, the combination of the set value "1" and the icon pattern 2). In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, when the setting value is "1", the icon pattern 2 may be selected at a low rate even if the setting value is "1". You may.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-26 (A) and 20-26 (B), when the set values are "1" and "2", the ratio of selecting the icon pattern 9 is extremely 1%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-27 (C), when the set value is "3", the ratio of selecting the icon pattern 9 is relatively high (30% probability in the case of a big hit). It is selected with, and if it is out of order, it is selected with a 20% probability). Therefore, in this example, when the icon images “★” are displayed in all of the panel images B to D in the super reach, the expectation that the set value is “3” is high. Therefore, with respect to the combination of a specific set value and the icon pattern (in this example, the combination of the set value "3" and the icon pattern 9), it is possible to increase the expectation for the set value having a high degree of advantage. In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, when the icon pattern 9 is selected, it may be configured to determine that the setting value is “3”.

In this example, the setting value "3" is used for the combination of the setting value "3" and the icon pattern 9 as an example in which the degree of expectation for the setting value differs depending on the combination of a specific setting value and the icon pattern. Although the case where the degree of expectation for the above is high is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a combination of the setting value "1" that raises the expectation for the setting value "1" and the icon pattern may be provided, or a combination of the setting value "2" and the icon pattern that raises the expectation for the setting value "2". May be provided.

Further, in this example, the case where the icon image is displayed in the super reach and the suggestion effect during the reach is executed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute the suggestion effect during reach in the full rotation reach in which all three decorative symbols rotate in a state where all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are aligned with the same symbol. Further, in this case, for example, the combination of a specific set value and the full rotation reach may be configured so as to increase the expectation for the set value having a high degree of advantage.

Further, the type of the icon pattern is not limited to the icon patterns 1 to 9 shown in this example. For example, in this example, the case where the icon image is displayed in all three panel images B to D other than the panel image A as in the icon patterns 2 to 9, but the panel images B to D are not necessarily displayed. It is not necessary to display the icon image in all of them, and the icon pattern may be configured so that the icon image is displayed only in one or two of the panel images B to D.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes an in-game suggestion effect determination process for determining the presence / absence of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 121IWS606).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the look-ahead zone effect executing flag is set (step 121IWS607). If the look-ahead zone effect executing flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display started this time is the variation display of the first special symbol (step 121IWS608). Whether or not to start the variation display of the first special symbol is determined by, for example, the first symbol variation specification command (designating to start the variation display of the first special symbol) transmitted at the start of the variation display. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the effect control command) has been received. When starting the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the look-ahead zone effect count counter (step 121IWS609).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the look-ahead zone effect count counter after addition is 1 (step 121IWS610). If the value of the look-ahead zone effect count counter is 1 (that is, when the first variable look-ahead zone effect is executed), the effect control CPU 120 determines the first effect pattern as the look-ahead zone effect pattern (step). 121IWS611). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS616.

If the value of the look-ahead zone effect count counter is not 1, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current variation display is a big hit (step 121IWS612). Whether or not the display is a variable display that is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area. In the case of a variable display that is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a big hit look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table according to the value of the look-ahead zone effect number counter as a table for determining the look-ahead zone effect pattern (step). 121IWS613). Further, if it is not a variable display that is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table for loss according to the value of the look-ahead zone effect number counter as a table for determining the look-ahead zone effect pattern. (Step 121 IWS614). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table, and determines the look-ahead zone effect pattern (step 121IWS615).

20-28 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table. Of these, FIG. 20-28 (A) shows a specific example of the jackpot look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 2 (when the look-ahead zone effect of the second variation is executed). ing. Further, FIG. 20-28 (B) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table for loss when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 2 (when the look-ahead zone effect of the second variation is executed). There is. Further, FIG. 20-28 (C) shows a specific example of the jackpot look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 3 (when the look-ahead zone effect of the third variation is executed). There is. Further, FIG. 20-28 (D) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table for loss when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 3 (when the look-ahead zone effect of the third variation is executed). There is. Further, FIG. 20-28 (E) shows a specific example of the jackpot look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 4 (when the read-ahead zone effect of the fourth variation is executed). There is. Further, FIG. 20-28 (F) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table for loss when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 4 (when the read-ahead zone effect of the fourth variation is executed). There is.

As shown in FIGS. 20-28, in this example, there are three types of look-ahead zone effect patterns 1 to 3 as look-ahead zone effect patterns. The look-ahead zone effect pattern 1 is a pattern suggesting that the set value is "1" if a big hit is obtained in the current variation display. Further, the look-ahead zone effect pattern 2 is a pattern suggesting that the set value is "2" if a big hit is obtained in the current variation display. Further, the look-ahead zone effect pattern 3 is a pattern suggesting that the set value is "3" if a big hit is obtained in the current variation display.

As shown in FIGS. 20-28, in this example, when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 2 (when executing the look-ahead zone effect of the second variation), the set value is “1” and a big hit occurs. The look-ahead zone effect pattern 1 is selected at a high rate of 80%. Further, when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 3 (when executing the look-ahead zone effect of the third variation), the set value is "2" and the look-ahead zone effect pattern 2 is 80% higher when it becomes a big hit. Select by percentage. Further, when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 4 (when executing the look-ahead zone effect of the 4th variation), the set value is "3" and the look-ahead zone effect pattern 3 is 80% higher when it becomes a big hit. Select by percentage. Therefore, in this example, when the set value "1" is suggested in the second variable look-ahead zone effect and a big hit occurs, the accuracy of the set value "1" is high, and the set value is set in the third variable look-ahead zone effect. When the value "2" is suggested and a big hit is made, the accuracy of the set value "2" is high, and when the set value "3" is suggested and the big hit is made in the look-ahead zone effect of the 4th variation. It is configured so that the accuracy of the set value "3" is high.

The configuration of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, depending on whether or not the variable display this time is the variable display of the advance notice target of the look-ahead zone effect, a different look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table may be used, or the determination values may be distributed differently. You may do it. In this case, for example, when the current variation display is the variation display of the advance notice target of the look-ahead zone effect, if the current variation display is off, the look-ahead zone effect pattern 3 suggesting the set value "3" is high. It may be configured so that a pattern suggesting a setting can be easily selected.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 may perform a look-ahead zone effect (for example, a look-ahead zone effect pattern) or reach if it is determined to execute the variation pattern, the look-ahead zone effect, the reach suggestion effect, and the game-in-game suggestion effect. A process table corresponding to the middle suggestion effect (for example, the icon pattern) and the in-game suggestion effect is selected (step 121IWS616). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 121IWS617).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative pattern in the variable mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 of the staging control board 12. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used to execute the effect control for the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, and an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as staging parts) is executed (step 121IWS618).

In the feature unit 121IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 121IWS619). Next, the effect control CPU 120 deletes one start winning command (design designation command, variable category command, and hold storage number addition designation command) stored in the storage area of the start winning command storage area. The content of the command storage area at the time of starting winning is shifted (step 121IWS620).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” (step 121IWS621), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(Suggestion production decision processing during the game)
FIG. 20-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the suggestion effect determination process (step 121IWS606) during the game. The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, when the effect control CPU 120 is in the special period (Y in step 121IWS701), the first in-game suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 121IWS702), and the effect is not in the special period. In the case (N of step 121IWS701), the suggestion effect determination table during the second game is selected (step 121IWS703). For example, when a setting change end command or a setting value command is received, the special period flag is set, and when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag is reset. For example, by confirming the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm whether or not the special period is in progress in step 121IWS701.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS704). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed (step 121IWS705).

FIG. 20-30 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestion effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 20-30 (B) is a second in-game suggestion effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination table.

In the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and 20-30, the in-game suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the game.

Further, regarding the second effect mode (appearance of mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of mini character A). Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in execution ratio between the set values becomes larger than that. That is, the second effect mode has a high degree of reliability that the set value is set to be more advantageous than the first effect mode.

Further, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and 20-30, the highly reliable second in-game suggestion effect is executed only during the special period. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and 20-30 (B), the third effect mode (character C appearance) may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the game according to the third effect mode.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the staging control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 121IWS706). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the set value is "1", and determines whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode by using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table. Step 121 IWS707).

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS706 to S707, the feature unit 121IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and 20-30, for the set value "1", the ratio of determining to execute the suggestion effect during the game is low, and the ratio determined to be the second effect mode is low. Is the lowest, and it may not be determined as the third effect mode. By making such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

If it is not the staging mode A, the staging control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current staging mode is the staging mode C (step 121IWS708). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 121IWS709).

FIG. 20-30 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-30 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the set value “3”. , It may not be determined as the third effect mode.

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS708 to S709, a disadvantageous set value is set in the feature unit 121IW when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, the situation in which the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the suggestion effect is restricted not to be executed during the game.

By executing the process of step 121IWS708, the feature unit 121IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the game when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. It is possible to reduce the situation in which the suggestion effect is executed during the game and disappoint the player even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the game may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the in-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the in-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and 20-30 (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the game.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and 20-30 (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is 2 or 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific setting value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In the feature unit 121IW, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect during the game at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the suggestion effect during the game (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

It should be noted that the feature unit 121IW is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect during the game of a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, but is not limited to such a configuration. , Different aspects of the suggestion effect during the game may be feasible. For example, the size, color, and the like of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

Further, the feature unit 121IW is configured so that whether or not the suggestion effect during the game is executed and the effect mode when the effect is executed are different depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern, the presence / absence of reach effect, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous effect, the type of pseudo-continuous effect, and the display result are big hits. Depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game, the effect mode when the effect is executed may be different.

For example, the suggestion effect during the game may be executed only when the variation pattern includes the reach effect (that is, the variation time is longer than the non-reach variation pattern). Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the super reach B and the fluctuation pattern including the super reach A having a higher expectation than the super reach B, the latter is more likely to execute the suggestion effect during the game. Alternatively, the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, the rate at which the suggestion effect during the game is executed is high, and the reliability when the suggestion effect is executed is high. It may be made higher.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the pseudo-ream effect and the variation pattern not including the pseudo-ream effect (or the number of pseudo-reams is smaller than that of the former), the former has a higher ratio of executing the suggestion effect during the game. It may be set to be high, or the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, or the rate when the suggestion effect during the game is executed is high and when it is executed. The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of performing the suggestion effect during the game, or the game. The reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high, or the ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed may be high, and the reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high. ..

(Variable display during staging process)
20-31 is a flowchart showing the variable display during staging process (step S172) in the staging control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 121IWS801) and 1 subtracts the variable time timer value (step 121IWS802). When the process timer times out (step 121IWS803), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 121IWS804). Further, the control state for the effector is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 121IWS805).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the super reach is being executed (step 121IWS806). Whether or not the super reach is being executed can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 121IWS619 of the variable display start setting process. If the super reach is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the push button 31B has been input (step 121IWS807). If the detection signal from the push button 31B is input (that is, if the push button 31B is in the ON state), the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of operations (number of repeated hits) of the push button 31B. The value of the operation count counter is added by 1 (step 121IWS808).

Next, the staging control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of super reach is determined to be super reach A (step 121IWS809). If it is determined to be Super Reach A, the process proceeds to step 121IWS818 as it is. Unless it is determined to be Super Reach A (that is, if it is determined to be Super Reach B to D), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation count counter is 1. Step 121 IWS810). If the value of the operation count counter is 1, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the panel image A if the panel image A corresponding to the super reach A is displayed on the image display device 5 (. Step 121 IWS811).

Step 121 When the processing of IWS809 to S811 is executed and the super reach B to D is determined, the display is started in the state where the panel images A to D are overlapped on the image display device 5, and then the push is performed. The panel image A is erased based on the fact that the button 31B is operated once.

If the value of the operation count counter is not 1, the staging control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of super reach is determined to be super reach B (step 121IWS812). If it is determined to be Super Reach B, the process proceeds to step 121IWS818 as it is. Unless it is determined to be super reach B (that is, if it is determined to be super reach C to D), the value of the operation count counter becomes the first predetermined number (for example, 10) in the effect control CPU 120. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 121IWS813). If the value of the operation count counter is the first predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the panel image B if the panel image B corresponding to the super reach B is displayed on the image display device 5. (Step 121 IWS814).

When the super reach C to D is determined by executing the processes of steps 121IWS812 to S814, the display is started with the panel images A to D overlapped on the image display device 5, and the panel image A is displayed. Is erased, and then the panel image B is erased based on the fact that the push button 31B is repeatedly hit for the first predetermined number (for example, 10 times).

If the value of the operation count counter is not the first predetermined number, the staging control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of super reach is determined to be super reach C (step 121IWS815). If it is determined to be Super Reach C, the process proceeds to step 121IWS818 as it is. Unless it is determined to be super reach C (that is, if it is determined to be super reach D), does the effect control CPU 120 have a second predetermined number (for example, 20) of the operation count counter value? Confirm whether or not (step 121IWS816). If the value of the operation count counter is the second predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the panel image C if the panel image C corresponding to the super reach C is displayed on the image display device 5. (Step 121 IWS817).

When the process of steps 121IWS815 to S817 is executed and the super reach D is determined, the display is started in a state where the panel images A to D are overlapped on the image display device 5, and the panel images A and the panel are displayed. After the image B is erased, the panel image C is erased based on the fact that the push button 31B is further pressed a second predetermined number (for example, 20 times).

Next, the staging control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the operation valid period during the super reach has expired (step 121IWS818). Whether or not the operation valid period has ended can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 121IWS619 of the variable display start setting process. If the operation valid period has not ended, the process proceeds to step 121IWS826 as it is. If the operation valid period has expired, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation count counter is 1 or more (step 121IWS819). If the value of the operation count counter is not 1 or more (that is, if the operation count counter value is 0 (that is, if the push button 31B is not operated even once within the operation valid period during super reach)), it is as it is. Step 121 Transition to IWS824.

If the value of the operation count counter is 1 or more (that is, if the push button 31B is operated at least once within the operation valid period during super reach), the effect control CPU 120 is super as a type of super reach. It is confirmed whether or not the case is determined to be reach C (step 121IWS820). If it is determined to be Super Reach C, the effect control CPU 120 controls to forcibly erase the panel image B if the panel image B is still displayed on the image display device 5 (step 121IWS821). It should be noted that the determination of Y in step 121IWS819 means that the push button 31B has been operated at least once, so that the panel image A should have been erased at least at this stage.

Unless it is determined to be Super Reach C, the staging control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is determined to be Super Reach D as the type of super reach (step 121IWS822). If it is determined to be Super Reach D, the effect control CPU 120 forcibly erases the panel image B and the panel image C if the panel image B and the panel image C are still displayed on the image display device 5. Control is performed (step 121IWS823). It should be noted that the determination of Y in step 121IWS819 means that the push button 31B has been operated at least once, so that the panel image A should have been erased at least at this stage.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be Super Reach D (that is, if it is determined to be Super Reach A or Super Reach B), the process proceeds to step 121IWS824 as it is.

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS819 to S823, in this example, when the super reach C or the super reach D is determined, the player operates the push buttons 31B up to the first predetermined number or the second predetermined number. If the panel image B and the panel image C are still displayed, the panel image C and the panel image D are forcibly displayed at the top. For example, if it is determined to be super reach C, the panel image C is forcibly displayed at the top, and if it is determined to be super reach D, the panel image D is forcibly displayed. It is considered to be the state displayed at the beginning. On the other hand, when it is determined that Super Reach B to D is performed and the player does not operate the push button 31B even once (in this case, the panel image A is still displayed at the top). ), The panel image A remains displayed at the beginning and is not changed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the process table corresponding to the super reach corresponding to the panel image displayed at the head of the image display device 5 (step 121IWS824). For example, when the panel image A is displayed at the beginning, the process data is switched to the process data corresponding to the super reach A, and when the panel image B is displayed at the beginning, the process data is switched to the process data corresponding to the super reach B. When the panel image C is displayed at the head, the process data is switched to the process data corresponding to the super reach C, and when the panel image D is displayed at the head, the process data is switched to the process data corresponding to the super reach D. Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 121IWS825).

After that, according to the process data switched in step 121IWS824, the processing of step 121IWS805 is executed at the timing of the timer interruption from the next time onward, so that the effect of developing into super reach A to D is executed.

The value of the operation count counter may be configured to be cleared to 0 when, for example, the super reach is terminated or the fluctuation display is terminated.

Then, if the variable time timer has timed out (step 121IWS826), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3" (step 121IWS827), and ends the variable display effect process.

(Production decision processing during big hit)
FIG. 20-33 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit medium effect determination process. The big hit middle effect determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-processing (step S114). In the big hit middle effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS901). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit, and the effect mode when the effect is executed are determined (step 121IWS902). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS907.

In step S121IWS902, when the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the first is shown in FIG. 20-34 (A). One big hit suggestion effect determination table is selected, and if it is not during a specific period, the second big hit suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-34 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table and the set value, it is determined whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this, for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the previous consecutive villa. It may be the time when the display is started, or it may be the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demo effect. Further, in this feature unit 121IW, the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as a specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as a specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and the first specific period (the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (the 51st variation after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a jackpot suggestion effect determination table in which the presence / absence of the jackpot suggestion effect and the determination rate of the effect mode are different depending on the period from the display to the execution of the 100th variation display).

In the first and second jackpot suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B), the jackpot suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, regarding the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the execution ratio between the set values in the specific period and the non-specific period. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference between them becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the jackpot suggestion effect with higher reliability is executed than in the non-specific period. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a specific period, and it is possible to enhance the interest. Not limited to the configuration of the feature unit 121IW, the jackpot suggestion effect (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and may not be executed in a non-specific period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-34 (A) and 20-34 (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit according to the fourth effect mode.

In the feature unit 121IW, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed by the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A1), the decorative symbol that becomes the big hit is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B1), the dialogue C image (“high setting !?”) 121IW102 is displayed.

Further, when the jackpot suggestion effect is executed according to the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A1), after the decorative symbol to be a jackpot is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, the figure is shown. As shown in 20-36 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 121IW105 is displayed.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the staging control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 121IWS903). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the set value is "1", and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table (the effect mode A). Step 121 IWS904). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS907.

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS903 to S904, the feature unit 121IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 20-34 (A) and 20-34 (B), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, the player is disappointed by the big hit suggestion effect being executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous setting value is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the game is played and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

If it is not the staging mode A, the staging control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current staging mode is the staging mode C (step 121IWS905). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the jackpot suggestion effect and the effect mode using the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 121IWS906). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS907.

FIG. 20-34 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIGS. 20-34 (C), in the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining that the jackpot suggestion effect is to be executed is low, and the set values are “2” and “3”. Compared with the above, the ratio determined to be the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and it may not be determined to be the fourth effect mode.

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS905 to S906, a disadvantageous set value is set in the feature unit 121IW when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to reduce the situation where the big hit suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player, and to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 121IWS907 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 121IWS905, the feature unit 121IW does not execute the jackpot suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. Even though a disadvantageous setting value is set, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed and the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the big hit middle suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the jackpot suggestion effect is set lower than the setting value "1" of the jackpot suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-34 (A) and 20-34 (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the big hit.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 20-34 (A) and 20-34 (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-34 (A), when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. You may. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be different depending on the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-34 (B), the ratio of the jackpot suggestion effect not being executed is the same regardless of the set value, but the ratio of not being executed is different depending on the set value. You may let it.

Further, in the present feature unit 121IW, when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the big hit middle suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a dialogue image suggesting a set value is displayed) may be executed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo-continuous effect is executed reaches the predetermined number of times, or when a specific super reach effect or the advance notice effect is executed.

In this feature unit 121IW, it is possible to execute the big hit middle suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value, but this is the big hit middle suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including the effect mode and the fourth effect mode) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode are different depending on the set value, and the set value. It is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) according to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the effect effect (step 121IWS907).

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (A1), it is assumed that the movable member 121IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 20-35 (B2), the movable member 121IW101 is controlled to move to the front surface of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A1) and 20-35 (B2), when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 121IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5, so that the image display device 5 has a big hit suggestion effect. The position where the dialogue image is displayed becomes difficult to see. In the feature unit 121IW, since the jackpot suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at different timings of the fanfare period in the jackpot game, the movable member 121IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 is a jackpot. It does not obscure the dialogue image displayed by the medium suggestion effect. However, if the movable member 121IW101 is operated by the accessory effect during the fanfare period, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 121IW101, and the dialogue image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect may be overlooked. Therefore, in step 121IWS907, by using the character effect effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-34 (D), the character effect effect is not executed when the big hit middle suggestion effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize and degrading the interest. Further, with such a configuration, even if the jackpot suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the jackpot suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize.

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the jackpot suggestion effect is performed. (Performed during the ending period), it may be possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the operation mode of the movable member 121IW101 is changed (for example, controlled so as not to stop at a position overlapping with the dialogue image by the jackpot suggestion effect), or the jackpot is hit. The display position of the dialogue image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit medium suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is decided, the execution of the character effect may be restricted by reducing the execution rate of the character effect. Further, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 20-34 (D), and the character effect may be executed at a low rate even when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the light guide plate effect is present (step 121IWS909) when the effect effect is not executed (N in step 121IWS908).

Here, a light guide plate 121IW103 having translucency capable of transmitting light and a light emitting body provided so as to allow light to enter from the end face of the light guide plate are provided on the front surface of the image display device 5, and the light guide plate 121IW103 is provided. It is assumed that the light emitting body is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects the light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 121IW103 from the end surface of the light guide plate 121IW103 and emits it to the front surface of the game machine. Then, by causing the light emitting body to emit light, it is possible to perform a light guide plate effect of emitting light from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 121IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B3), light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 121IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine, resulting in a “big hit”. Character appears. Further, during the execution of the light guide plate effect, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5.

In step 121 IWS909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-34 (E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios depending on the presence or absence of the suggestion effect during the big hit and the effect mode when the effect is executed. To. Specifically, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is performed. When the effect is executed, the rate at which the light guide plate effect is executed is low. That is, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to see. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B4), the light guide plate effect is executed when the dialogue A image (“setting is ...”) 121IW104 is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode. Then, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the dialogue A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the game's interest due to the suggestion effect during the big hit of the effect mode that is not desirable for the player. When the jackpot suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate). The production may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion production during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

(Small hit end production process)
20-37 is a flowchart showing the small hit end effect process (step S175) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the effect period measurement timer (step 121IWS1001). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the effect period measurement timer after the subtraction has timed out (step 121IWS1002). The effect period measurement timer is set, for example, based on confirmation of receipt of the small hit end designation command in the small hit medium effect process (see step S174).

If the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 121IWS1002), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 121IWS1003). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, and an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of the game effect lamp 9 and the speakers 8L, 8R as staging parts) is executed (step 121IWS1004).

Next, if the process timer has not timed out (N in step 121IWS1005), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process. When the process timer times out (Y in step 121IWS1005), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 121IWS1006). Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer (step 121IWS1007).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect stage determination table according to the small hit type as a table for determining whether or not to change the effect stage after the end of the small hit game and the type of the changed effect stage. (Step 121IWS1008). Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected effect stage determination table, and determines whether or not to change the effect stage after the end of the small hit game and the type of the changed effect stage. (Step 121 IWS 1009).

20-38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the staging stage determination table. Of these, FIGS. 20-38 (A) show a specific example of the effect stage determination table selected when the small hit type A is selected. Further, FIG. 20-38 (B) shows a specific example of the effect stage determination table selected when the small hit type B is selected. Further, FIG. 20-38 (C) shows a specific example of the effect stage determination table selected when the small hit type C is selected.

As shown in FIGS. 20-38, judgment values are assigned to the staging stage determination table for no change in the staging stage, change to staging stage A, change to staging stage B, and change to staging stage C. There is. When the effect stage is changed, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, when the set value is "1", the rate of change to the effect stage A is high. Therefore, in this example, it is suggested that the set value is "1" when the stage A is changed to the effect stage A after the end of the small hit game. Further, when the effect stage is changed, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, when the set value is "2", the rate of change to the effect stage B is high. Therefore, in this example, it is suggested that the set value is "2" when the stage B is changed to the effect stage B after the end of the small hit game. Further, when the effect stage is changed, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the effect stage C may be changed only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, in this example, it is suggested that the set value is "3" when the stage C is changed to the effect stage C after the end of the small hit game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-38 (C), in this example, in the case of the small hit type C, the effect stage A is selected at a high ratio of 50% when the set value is “1”. When the setting value is "2", the production stage B is selected at a high ratio of 60%, and when the setting value is "3", the production stage C is selected at a high ratio of 50%. There is. Therefore, in this example, the suggestion of the set value by the effect stage changed after the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type C has the highest reliability. On the other hand, in this example, in the case of the small hit type A, the ratio of selecting the effect stage A when the set value is "1" is only 30%, and when the set value is "2", the effect stage is selected. The ratio of selecting B is only 40%, and the ratio of selecting the effect stage C when the set value is "3" is only 30%. Therefore, in this example, the suggestion of the set value by the effect stage changed after the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type A has the lowest reliability.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the effect stage is not always changed after the end of the small hit game, and the effect stage may be determined without change, but the set value "1". -The ratio determined without changing the production stage differs depending on which of "3" (in other words, the ratio of changing the production stage also differs).

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, an effect stage C for determining that the set value is "3" is provided, and a specific effect stage (in this example, an effect) is provided according to the set value. The rate of change to stage C) is different. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, even if the set value is "1" or "2", the stage C may be changed to the effect stage C at a low rate.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the case where the presence / absence of the change of the effect stage and the determination ratio of the type of the effect stage after the change are different is shown by the lottery process by the effect control CPU 120. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, when the gaming machine is configured so that the small hit probability differs depending on which of the set values "1" to "3", the small hit probability differs depending on the set value, and as a result, the production stage is changed. It may be configured so that the presence / absence of the presence and the determination ratio of the type of the effect stage after the change are different. Further, for example, the presence / absence of the change of the effect stage for each small hit type and the determination ratio of the type of the effect stage after the change are configured to be the same, and the set value is any of "1" to "3". By determining the small hit type according to different ratios, the presence / absence of the change of the effect stage and the determination ratio of the type of the effect stage after the change may be different.

When it is decided to change the effect stage (Y) in (step 121IWS1010), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image displayed on the image display device 5 into a background image according to the changed effect stage. Control to change (step 121IWS1011).

In the feature unit 121IW, when a small hit occurs and the effect stage is changed, a background image corresponding to the changed effect stage is displayed over a plurality of variable displays until the next small hit occurs. And.

Not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, after changing the effect stage and ending the variation display a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the process returns to the normal effect stage and returns to the normal background image. It may be configured. Further, for example, the staging stage may be configured to be changeable each time a small hit occurs, or once the staging stage is changed, even if a small hit occurs, the staging stage is not changed again. It may be configured.

Further, in this example, when the effect stage is changed after the end of the small hit game, the background image corresponding to the changed effect stage is displayed over a plurality of variable displays. I can't be limited. For example, it is not always necessary to execute it over a plurality of variable displays, and an effect suggesting a set value is executed only once after the end of the small hit game (a single effect suggesting a set value is executed). It may be configured.

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 121IWS1002), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "0" (step 121IWS1012), and ends the small hit end effect process.

Next, an example of the production in the feature unit 121IW will be described. First, an effect mode in which the effect stage is changed after the small hit game is completed will be described. 20-39 and 20-40 are explanatory views showing an example of an effect mode when the effect stage is changed after the end of the small hit game. In addition, in FIGS. 20-39 and 20-40, it is assumed that the staging modes change in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

First, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-39, it is assumed that the set value is set to "1". As shown in FIG. 20-39 (A), the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is executed, and as shown in FIG. 20-39 (B), the small hit of the small hit type B is executed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. It is assumed that the symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "357") is confirmed and displayed, and the small hit game is executed. Then, it is assumed that it is decided to change to the effect stage A suggesting that the set value is "1", and as shown in FIGS. 20-39 (C), the image display device 5 corresponds to the effect stage A. It is assumed that the background image has been changed. In the example shown in FIGS. 20-39 (C), the background image corresponding to the staging stage A is changed to an image in which a school of fish 121IW106 is swimming in the sea.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-40, it is assumed that the set value is set to "3". As shown in FIG. 20-40 (A), the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is executed, and as shown in FIG. 20-40 (B), the small hit of the small hit type C is executed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. It is assumed that the symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "579") is confirmed and displayed, and the small hit game is executed. Then, it is assumed that it is decided to change to the effect stage C suggesting that the set value is "3", and as shown in FIG. 20-40 (C), the image display device 5 corresponds to the effect stage C. It is assumed that the background image has been changed. In the example shown in FIGS. 20-40 (C), as a background image corresponding to the staging stage C, a case where the rocket 121IW107 is changed to an image of flying toward the moon 121IW108 in outer space is shown.

The staging mode shown in FIGS. 20-39 and 20-40 is an example. For example, in the case of the small hit type A, the small hit is shown in FIGS. 20-39 (B) and 20-40 (B). The small hit symbol of type A (for example, a combination of symbols of "135") may be fixedly displayed. Further, for example, when the stage is changed to the production stage B, the background image corresponding to the production stage B in FIGS. 20-39 (C) and 20-40 (C) (for example, a flock of birds flies in the air). It should be changed to an image that looks like it is.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-39, the case where the stage A is changed to the effect stage A is shown, but in this example, even when the set value is "1", the stage B is changed to the effect stage B at a low rate. (See Figures 20-38). Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-40, the case of being changed to the staging stage C is shown, but in this example, even when the set value is "3", the staging stage A and the staging stage are performed at a low rate. May be changed to B (see Figures 20-38).

In addition, the effect mode when the effect stage is changed after the end of the small hit game is not limited to that shown in FIGS. 20-39 and 20-40. For example, a battle effect is executed at the end of the small hit game, and when the ally character wins the battle, the effect stage is changed and the background image is switched to suggest the set value, and when the ally character loses the battle, the effect stage. May be configured so that is not changed and the background image is not changed. As such, various production modes can be considered.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value is suggested by changing the effect stage after the end of the small hit game is shown, but the method of suggesting the set value in relation to the small hit is the one shown in this example. I can't be limited. For example, when the period of the small hit game is secured to some extent, a predetermined character or the like associated with the set value may appear during the small hit game to suggest the set value. .. Further, for example, when a plurality of combinations of small hit symbols (combination of decorative symbols) are provided, the small hit symbol is configured to be associated with the set value, and any small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. It may be configured so that the set value is suggested depending on whether or not it is used. In addition, for example, in the case of a configuration that can shift to the so-called probability variation incubation period after a sudden big hit or a small hit, the set value can be suggested depending on whether the probability variation incubation period after the small hit is long or short, or the probability variation incubation period. It may be configured to execute an effect suggesting a set value inside.

Further, in this example, the case where the staging stage is changed assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied with the end of the small hit game is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a lottery process based on a random number may be performed, and the production stage may be changed assuming that a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the winning of the lottery. Further, for example, the effect stage may be changed assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the number of times the variation display is executed reaches the predetermined number of times.

Next, an effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect will be described. 20-41 and 20-42 are explanatory views for explaining the effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect. In addition, in FIGS. 20-41 and 20-42, it is assumed that the staging mode changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

As shown in FIG. 20-41 (A), a new start prize is generated in the first start prize opening during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and four first hold displays are accumulated in the first hold storage display unit 121IW109. It is assumed that the state has been reached. Then, it is assumed that the execution of the look-ahead zone effect is decided based on the new start winning to the first starting winning opening.

Next, when the first variation display is executed after the start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening, the look-ahead zone effect based on the initial effect pattern is executed as shown in FIG. 20-41 (B). In the example shown in FIGS. 20-41 (B), the image display device 5 shows a case where the character 121IW110 is displayed and the character display 121IW111 of "zone entry!" Is displayed as a line of the character 121IW110. ..

If a big hit occurs in the first fluctuation display, the look-ahead zone effect is terminated as it is, and the screen does not move to the subsequent effect screen shown in FIGS. 20-41 (C) (hence, in this case, the look-ahead zone). Although the effect is executed, the setting value is not practically suggested).

Next, it is assumed that the look-ahead zone effect pattern 1 is determined as the look-ahead zone effect pattern when the second variation display is executed after the start prize is generated in the first start-up prize opening (see FIGS. 20-28). Then, as shown in FIGS. 20-41 (C), the look-ahead zone effect based on the look-ahead zone effect pattern 1 is executed. In the example shown in FIGS. 20-41 (C), the character 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the dialogue of the character 121IW110 is "If it hits now, the setting is" 1 "? The character display 121IW112 is displayed.

If a big hit occurs in the second variation display, the look-ahead zone effect is ended as it is, and the screen does not move to the subsequent effect screen shown in FIGS. 20-41 (D). In this case, "If you hit it now, setting" 1 "? It is suggested that the set value is set to "1" based on the fact that a big hit occurs when the character display 121IW112 of "" is displayed.

Next, it is assumed that the look-ahead zone effect pattern 2 is determined as the look-ahead zone effect pattern when the third variation display is executed after the start prize is generated in the first start-up prize opening (see FIGS. 20-28). Then, as shown in FIGS. 20-41 (D), the look-ahead zone effect based on the look-ahead zone effect pattern 2 is executed. In the example shown in FIGS. 20-41 (D), the character 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the dialogue of the character 121IW110 is "If it hits now, the setting is" 2 "? The character display 121IW113 is displayed.

If a big hit occurs in the third variation display, the look-ahead zone effect is ended as it is, and the screen does not shift to the subsequent effect screen shown in FIGS. 20-41 (D). In this case, "If you hit it now, setting" 2 "? It is suggested that the set value is set to "2" based on the fact that a big hit occurs when the character display 121IW113 of "" is displayed.

Next, it is assumed that the look-ahead zone effect pattern 3 is determined as the look-ahead zone effect pattern when the fourth variation display is executed after the start prize is generated in the first start-up prize opening (see FIGS. 20-28). Then, as shown in FIG. 20-42 (E), the look-ahead zone effect based on the look-ahead zone effect pattern 3 is executed. In the example shown in FIGS. 20-42 (E), the character 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the dialogue of the character 121IW110 is "If it hits now, the setting" 3 "? The character display 121IW114 is displayed.

If the third variation display is a big hit, the look-ahead zone effect ends. In this case, "If you hit now, setting" 3 "? It is suggested that the set value is set to "3" based on the fact that a big hit occurs when the character display 121IW114 of "" is displayed. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the look-ahead zone effect is terminated even when the big hit does not occur in the third variation display (hence, in this case, the so-called look-ahead zone effect of Gase is executed. ).

It should be noted that FIGS. 20-41 and 20-42 are examples, and for example, even when the second variation display is executed after the start winning, the ratio is low in FIGS. 20-41 (C). In some cases, a look-ahead zone effect suggesting a set value "2" or "3" is executed (see FIGS. 20-28). Further, for example, even when the third variation display is executed after the start winning, the look-ahead zone effect suggesting the set values "1" and "3" is executed at a low rate in FIGS. 20-41 (D). (See Figures 20-28). Further, for example, even when the fourth variation display is executed after the start winning, the look-ahead zone effect suggesting the set values "1" and "2" is executed at a low rate in FIGS. 20-42 (E). (See Figures 20-28).

Further, in this example, when the first variation display is executed after the start winning, the look-ahead zone effect is executed based on the initial effect pattern, and the character display 121IW111 of "zone entry!" Is displayed. However, even when the first variation display is executed, the effect suggesting the set values "1" to "3" in the same manner as in FIGS. 20-41 (C) to 20-42 (E). May be configured to run.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value is suggested as assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of a big hit during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured so that the set value is suggested as if the predetermined condition is satisfied by displaying a predetermined character or emitting a lamp or LED during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect. Can be considered.

Further, in this example, the case where the look-ahead zone effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays is shown, but the setting value is suggested in the effect executed during one variable display, for example, not limited to such an aspect. It may be configured as possible. For example, a gauge display in which the indicator moves with the passage of time is displayed on the image display device 5 during one fluctuation display, and at which point in the gauge display the indicator is at which point, some effect achievement condition is satisfied ( For example, it may be configured so that the set value is suggested based on winning the battle or clearing the mission).

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-41 and 20-42, when the look-ahead zone effect is executed in a plurality of fluctuation displays, "if this is the case, setting" 1 "" for each fluctuation display. ?? Or "If you hit it now, setting" 2 "? A case where the current setting value is suggested by displaying a character display such as "" is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, during one fluctuation display, "If you hit now, setting" 1 "? Or "If you hit it now, setting" 2 "? Even if the character display such as "" is switched in order and displayed, the current setting value is suggested by the content of the character display that was finally displayed when the big hit occurred at the end of the variable display. good. For example, "If you hit it now, setting" 2 "? When the variable display ends and a big hit occurs while the character display of "" is displayed, it is suggested that the setting value is "2", and "If it hits now, the setting" 3 "? When the variable display ends and a big hit occurs while the character display of "" is displayed, it may be suggested that the set value is "3". Further, when the character display is switched in order during one variable display, for example, the character display may be configured to be switched at the timing of the occurrence of the advance notice effect or the timing of the development of the reach effect. good. Further, for example, in the case of a variable display accompanied by a pseudo-ream, the character display may be switched at the timing of re-variation.

Next, an effect mode of the suggestion effect during reach will be described. 20-43 and 20-44 are explanatory views for explaining the effect mode of the suggestion effect during reach. In addition, in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, it is assumed that the staging mode changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

As shown in FIGS. 20-43 (A), when the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, the super reach D is executed as the type of super reach based on the fact that the super reach is specified in the variation pattern. (See FIGS. 20-25), and icon pattern 5 is determined as the icon pattern (see FIGS. 20-26 (A) to (D)).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 20-43 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the same symbol (in this example, the symbol "7"), and normal reach occurs. Next, when the start timing of the super reach comes, as shown in FIG. 20-43 (C), in the image display device 5, the panel image A121IW115 corresponding to the super reach A is at the head, and the panel image B121IW116 corresponding to the super reach B is started. , The panel image C121IW117 corresponding to the super reach C and the panel image C121IW118 corresponding to the super reach D are displayed in an overlapping state in order. Further, based on the determination of the icon pattern 5, the icon image "●" 121IW119 is displayed on the panel image B121IW116, the icon image "▲" 121IW120 is displayed on the panel image C121IW117, and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed. The icon image "★" 121IW121 is displayed.

Next, when the operation of the push button 31B by the player is detected once, the top panel image A121IW115 is erased and the panel image B121IW116 is displayed at the top, as shown in FIGS. 20-43 (D). ..

Next, when the player repeatedly hits the push button 31B and the number of repeated hits reaches the first predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the first panel image B121IW116 is erased as shown in FIGS. 20-44 (E). The panel image C121IW117 is displayed at the top.

Next, when the player repeatedly hits the push button 31B and the number of repeated hits reaches the second predetermined number (for example, 20 times), the first panel image C121IW117 is erased as shown in FIGS. 20-44 (F). Only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed.

After that, when it comes to the development timing of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 20-44 (G), the last remaining panel image D121IW118 is displayed in such a manner that it is enlarged on the entire display screen of the image display device 5, and FIG. 20- As shown in 44 (H), the production of the mode that develops into Super Reach D is executed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, the icon image "★" 121IW121 is displayed on the panel image D121IW118, which is finally displayed at the top, so that the current setting value is set. It is suggested that there is a high possibility that it is "3".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, the case where the execution of the super reach D is decided is shown. However, for example, when the execution of the super reach A is decided, the push button is displayed. Even if the 31B is operated, the panel image A121IW115 shown in FIG. 20-43 (C) does not change as it is displayed at the head, and when the development timing of the super reach comes, the panel image A121IW115 displays the image display device 5. An enlarged mode is displayed on the entire screen, and an effect of a mode that develops into Super Reach A is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the super reach B is determined, even if the push button 31B is operated, the panel image B121IW116 shown in FIGS. 20-43 (D) can be changed only to the state where the panel image B121IW116 is displayed at the top. However, when the development timing of the super reach is reached, the panel image B121IW116 is displayed in an enlarged manner on the entire display screen of the image display device 5, and the effect of developing the super reach B is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of Super Reach C is determined, even if the push button 31B is operated, the panel image C121IW117 shown in FIGS. 20-44 (E) can be changed only to the state where it is displayed at the top. However, when the development timing of the super reach is reached, the panel image C121IW117 is displayed in an enlarged manner on the entire display screen of the image display device 5, and the effect of the mode of developing into the super reach C is executed.

Further, for example, even though the execution of the super reach D is decided, the player does not operate the push button 31B at all or repeatedly hits the second predetermined number, as shown in FIGS. 20-44 (F). It is also conceivable that the panel image D121IW118 does not change until only the displayed state is displayed. In that case, in this example, if the push button 31B is operated at least once, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are forcibly erased, and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed at the top. , Develops into Super Reach D. However, if the push button 31B has not been operated even once and the panel image A121IW115 remains displayed at the beginning, in this example, the panel image A121IW115 remains displayed at the beginning. Instead, it develops into Super Reach A.

In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, even if the push button 31B is not operated even once, it may be configured to forcibly develop into super reach D. Further, even when the execution of the super reach D is decided, if the state does not change until only the panel image 121IW118 is displayed, finally according to the panel image displayed at the top. It may be configured to develop into Super Reach B or Super Reach C.

Further, for example, when the player does not operate the push button 31B, it may be configured to develop into a super reach having nothing to do with the suggestion of the set value.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, the case where the icon images 121IW119 to 121 are displayed and the in-reach suggestion effect is executed is shown. For example, the icon pattern 1 is determined and the in-reach suggestion is performed. When it is determined that the effect is not executed, only each panel image is displayed in FIGS. 20-43 (C) to 20-44 (G), and the icon image is not displayed.

In this example, the icon image is not displayed at all when the suggestion effect during reach is not executed during super reach, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the suggestion effect during reach is not executed, an item image having nothing to do with the set value may be displayed on each panel image so as not to have anything to do with the suggestion of the set value. ..

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, the panel images are erased one by one according to the operation of the push button 31B, so that the stages of the super reach effect are one by one. Although the case where the set value is suggested in the production of the ascending mode is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when displaying a meter display that gradually raises the level of the meter according to the operation of the player, it is configured to suggest the set value by displaying an icon image or a telop corresponding to the set value. May be good. Further, for example, the reach effect itself such as super reach does not change stepwise, and only the icon image and the telop display corresponding to the set value change stepwise according to the operation of the player. You may. Further, for example, it is not always necessary to involve the operation of the player, and the icon image and the telop display corresponding to the set value may be configured to change stepwise regardless of the operation, and various production modes may be used. Conceivable.

Further, for example, the suggestion effect during reach as shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44 may be associated with the display result of the variable display. For example, when a big hit occurs in the variation display when the in-reach suggestion effect as shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44 is executed, the set value suggested in the in-reach suggestion effect is confirmed. Alternatively, it may be configured to determine that the value is equal to or higher than the set value suggested by the suggestion effect during reach.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-43 (C) to 20-44 (E), the icon image is visually displayed for the panel image other than the panel image displayed at the head. Although the case is shown, not limited to such an aspect, the icon image may be configured to be displayed only in the panel image displayed at the head. In this case, for example, in FIGS. 20-43 (C), since the panel image A121IW115 is displayed at the beginning, the panel image B121IW116 to the panel image D121IW118 are all displayed in a state where the icon image is not displayed. Then, in FIG. 20-43 (D), when the panel image A121IW115 is erased and the panel image B121IW116 is displayed at the top, the icon image 121IW119 is displayed on the panel image B121IW116. Then, in FIG. 20-44 (E), when the panel image B121IW116 is erased and the panel image C121IW117 is displayed at the top, the icon image 121IW120 is displayed on the panel image C121IW117. Next, in FIG. 20-44 (F), when the panel image C121IW117 is erased and only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed, the icon image 121IW121 is displayed on the panel image D121IW118. good.

Further, in this example, for example, even though the execution of the super reach D is determined, the player does not repeatedly hit the push buttons 31B up to the second predetermined number, and only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed. If there is no change, if the push button 31B is operated at least once, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are forcibly erased, and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed at the top. However, when the icon image is configured to be displayed only for the panel image displayed at the beginning as described above, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are not displayed at the beginning, so that the panel is displayed. The icon image of the image B121IW116 or the panel image C121IW117 may not be displayed. Further, even when the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are forcibly erased, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are displayed in order for a very short time (for example, 1 second), so that the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are displayed in order for a very short time (for example, 1 second). The icon image may be displayed on the panel image B121IW116 or the panel image C121IW117 for a time (for example, 1 second).

In the feature unit 121IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in such a manner that it is difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed with priority over the jackpot suggestion effect (or the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error. Further, when a predetermined effect that can be executed at the same time as the jackpot suggestion effect (for example, a fanfare effect having a specific effect mode) is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect. May give priority to the suggestion effect during the big hit. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the image displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect, it is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect. The image may be displayed preferentially. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 121IW, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the decorative pattern is variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body having the decorative pattern arranged on the surface. It may be applied (that is, it may be applied to a so-called drum type gaming machine). Alternatively, the decorative pattern may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having a decorative pattern arranged on the surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type gaming machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel-type gaming machine, at the start of the first fluctuation after changing the setting, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation (or characteristic) different from the normal time. Operation may occur). Therefore, in the initial fluctuation after the setting change, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the ratio of execution may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

Further, in the present feature unit 121IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are configured so as to reduce the visibility of the jackpot suggestion effect, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the character effect effect and the light guide plate effect. Further, in this case as well, the visibility may be reduced at a high rate when an undesired suggestion is made to the player. For example, when an even initial result is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility of these is reduced. It is also possible to increase the ratio of executing the accessory effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect of displaying characters and pictures by the light guide plate. Further, the effect is not limited to the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect, and includes a control to output a predetermined sound, a control to vibrate the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and a control to emit a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined mode. By doing so, the player's attention may be directed to others, and the visibility of the initial roll effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced (or less noticeable).

Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the feature unit 121IW, the simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer set at the time of turning on the power or the real-time clock) is executed in a specific mode. May suggest the setting.

In addition, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image) suggesting a setting according to the number of times that the variable display is continuously executed without the hold storage becoming 0 or the number of times when a start winning prize exceeding the upper limit hold storage number occurs. Display control, output control of predetermined sound, light emission control of predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Further, a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during the predetermined operation valid period (for example, display control of a predetermined image, output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined). (Controlling the light emission of the lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Although the feature portion 121IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, the feature portion 121IW illustrates a form in which the security cover 121IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 121IW001a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 121IW003 side. May be good. Specifically, as a modification 1, as shown in FIGS. 20-45 (A) and 20-45 (B), a security cover 121IW500B composed of a short piece 121IW500Ba and a long piece 121IW500Bb is attached to, for example, a substrate case 121IW201. The right end of the long piece 121IW500Bb slides left and right between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 and the uncovering position on the right side of the covering position. Installed so that it can be moved.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the security cover 121IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 121IW201, and is set via the through hole 121IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 121IW500Bb. The key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may be operable. That is, in the present modification 1, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the security cover 121IW500B (long piece 121IW500Bb) covers the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 in the left-right direction with respect to the board case 121IW201. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state by restricting the slide movement to. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open, the security cover 121IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 121IW201 to release the state of covering the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to an allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-45 (A) and 20-45 (B), when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the protruding dimension of the security cover 121IW500B from the board case 121IW201 is length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the protruding dimension of the security cover 121IW500B from the board case 121IW201 is extended to the length L2 by sliding the security cover 121IW500B with respect to the board case 121IW201. (L2> L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 20-46 (A), when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 121IW500B has a protrusion dimension from the substrate case 121IW201. By sliding the pachinko game machine 1 to the board case 121IW201 until the length reaches L2 (the pachinko game machine 1 is allowed), a pachinko game clerk or the like operates the setting key 121IW051 or the setting changeover switch 121IW052. The set value of the machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 20-46 (B), the security cover 121IW500B is attached to the board case 121IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 121IW201 becomes the length L1. On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not slid to move (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 121IW500B will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 121IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 121IW003. It has become.

Therefore, in the present modification 1, since it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 121IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, the setting key 121IW051 is set by the security cover 121IW500B. It is possible to prevent the game machine frame 121IW003 from being forgotten to be covered with the changeover switch 121IW052, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 121IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 121IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 121IW001a and the gaming machine frame 121IW003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left-right direction is restricted. However, the security cover 121IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state in which the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are covered by the security cover 121IW500B is maintained. ..

(Modification 2)
Further, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 121IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 20-47 (A) and 20-47 (B) as modification 2, the left end portion of the security cover 121IW500C is provided on the gaming machine. A cover position that covers the right side of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 and rotation from the covering position around the pivot axis 121IW500Cd that faces in the vertical direction provided on the back side of the frame 121IW003. It may be rotatably pivotally supported from the uncovered position. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 121IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 121IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 121IW001a, and the long piece 121IW500Cb is set and switched to the setting key 121IW051. The rotation of the switch 121IW052 from the back surface side to the back surface side may be restricted.

Then, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the security cover 121IW500C is rotated around the pivot 121IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 121IW201 to form the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052. It suffices to release the covered state and make it operable. That is, in the present modification 2, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, rotation is restricted with the security cover 121IW500C (long piece 121IW500Cb) covering the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open, the security cover 121IW500C is rotated around the pivot 121IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 121IW201 to press the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the regulated state (can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-48 (A), the security cover 121IW500C in the second modification is rotated around the pivot 121IW500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state. A clerk or the like can change the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by operating the setting key 121IW051 or the setting changeover switch 121IW052. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIGS. 20-48 (B), the security cover 121IW500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and the setting key is set by the security cover 121IW500C. If the 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are not covered (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 121IW500C will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 121IW001a and close the gaming machine frame 121IW003. Is impossible.

Therefore, in the present modification 2, since it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 121IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, the setting key 121IW051 is set by the security cover 121IW500C. It is possible to prevent the game machine frame 121IW003 from being forgotten to be covered with the changeover switch 121IW052, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 121IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

(Modification 3)
Further, the feature portion 121IW exemplifies a mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 121IW003, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame is not limited thereto. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed by opening 121IW003a. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 121IW003a in this way, it is shown in FIGS. 20-49 (A) to 20-49 (C) as a modification 3. As described above, the through hole 121IW003b may be formed in the lower part of the gaming machine frame 121IW003 so that the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 can be operated via the through port 121IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are on the opposite side of the mounting surface on the main board 11. Placed on the surface.

When the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 can be operated via the through port 121IW003b, a door body 121IW003c capable of opening and closing the through port 121IW003b is provided, and the door body 121IW003c is closed. The operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 20-49 (B) and 20-49 (C), when the door body 121IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 121IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 121IW003a. Since the 121IW003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 121IW003a and the gaming machine frame 121IW003 so as to be openable and closable, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may be illegally operated when the glass door frame 121IW003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented and security can be improved.

(Modification example 4)
In this feature unit 121IW, the case where the setting value is suggested by changing the effect stage after the end of the small hit game and switching to the background image according to the changed effect stage is shown, but it fluctuates after the end of the small hit game. It may be configured to suggest a set value by switching a pattern table and executing a series of set value suggestion effects over a plurality of variable displays. Hereinafter, a modification 4 for switching the fluctuation pattern table after the end of the small hit game will be described.

In the fourth modification, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) ends the small hit game, specifically, in the small hit end process (step S120) in the special symbol process process. A post-small hit flag indicating that it is after the end of the small hit game shall be set.

FIG. 20-50 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the modification 4. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the flag after the small hit is set (step 121IWS1101). If the post-small hit flag is not set (that is, not after the end of the small hit game), the CPU 103 serves as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern, whether it is a big hit, whether it is a small hit, or whether it is a big hit. The fluctuation pattern determination table according to the type and the small hit type is selected (step 121IWS1102). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS1107.

If the small hit after flag is set (that is, after the small hit game ends), the CPU 103 sets the value of the small hit after number counter for counting the number of fluctuations after the small hit game ends to 1. Add (step 121 IWS 1103). Further, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table for after a small hit as a table for determining the variation pattern (step 121IWS1104).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the counter for the number of small hits is a predetermined value (for example, 3) (step 121IWS1105). If the value of the counter for the number of small hits is not a predetermined value, the process proceeds to step 121IWS1107. If the value of the small hit after number counter is a predetermined value, the CPU 103 resets the small hit after flag and resets (0 clears) the small hit after number counter (step 121IWS1106). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS1107.

Then, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern determination table selected in steps 121IWS1102 and 1104 to perform a lottery process based on random numbers to determine the variation pattern (step 121IWS1107).

In the modified example 4, by executing the processes of steps 121IWS1103 to S1107, only after the small hit, until the variation display for a predetermined value (for example, three variation display) is completed after the end of the small hit game. The fluctuation pattern of is determined. In this example, it is assumed that a fixed fluctuation pattern is determined with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds as a fluctuation pattern dedicated to after a small hit.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, even before the end of the variation display for a predetermined value after the end of the small hit game, if the big hit or the small hit occurs, the big hit or the small hit It may be configured to determine the variation pattern for the hit.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 121IWS1108).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS1109). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step 121IWS1110).

FIG. 20-51 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the modification 4. In Modification 4, the processing of steps 121IWS601 to S602 is the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 20-24. When the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined in step 121IWS602, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 121IWS601 is a variation pattern dedicated after a small hit (step). 121IWS631). In the case of a variation pattern dedicated to after a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect count counter for counting the number of effects of the small hit post-suggestion effect suggesting a set value after the end of the small hit game to 1. Add (step 121IWS632).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the effect number counter after addition is 1 (step 121IWS633). If the value of the effect count counter is not 1 (that is, when the fluctuation display is performed for the second and subsequent times after the end of the small hit game), the process proceeds to step 121IWS636 as it is. If the value of the effect count counter is 1 (that is, when the first variation display after the small hit game is performed), the effect control CPU 120 is small for determining the type of the effect suggestive effect after the small hit. Using the post-hit suggestion effect determination table, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed to determine the type of post-hit suggestion effect (step 121IWS634). Then, the effect control CPU 120 stores the determined type of post-small hit suggestion effect in the storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 121IWS635).

20-52 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the suggestion effect determination table after a small hit. As shown in FIGS. 20-52, in this example, there are three types of post-small hit suggestion effects 1 to 3. In this example, the suggestion effect after the small hit is varied from the first time, the second time, and the third time over a plurality of fluctuation displays (for example, in a total of 90 seconds of three fluctuation displays fixed at 30 seconds after the small hit). It is configured as a series of effects that are executed in such a manner that the story develops in order as the display is executed. Of these, the small hit post-suggestion effect 1 is an effect that suggests that a series of effects are executed and finally the set value is "1" (for example, a battle effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the final third variation A character reminiscent of the set value "1" wins the battle). Further, the small hit post-suggestion effect 2 is an effect that suggests that a series of effects are executed and finally the set value is "2" (for example, a battle effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuations and is set at the final third variation. A character reminiscent of the value "2" wins the battle). Further, the small hit post-suggestion effect 3 is an effect that suggests that a series of effects are executed and finally the set value is "3" (for example, a battle effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuations and is set at the final third variation. A character reminiscent of the value "3" wins the battle).

As shown in FIGS. 20-52, in this example, when the set value is "1", the rate of selecting the suggestion effect 1 after the small hit is high, and when the set value is "2", the suggestion effect 1 is selected after the small hit. The ratio of selecting the suggestion effect 2 is high, and when the set value is "3", the ratio of selecting the suggestion effect 3 after a small hit is high.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the type of the determined small hit post-suggestion effect (step 121IWS636). In this case, in the case of the first variation display after the end of the small hit game (in the case of Y in step 121IWS633), the suggestion effect after the small hit determined in step 121IWS634 and stored in the RAM 122 in step 121IWS635 corresponds to the type. Select a process table. Further, in the case of the second variation display after the end of the small hit game (when N in step 121IWS633), the type of the suggestion effect after the small hit determined in the first variation display after the end of the small hit game is Since it should be stored in the RAM 122, a process table according to the type is selected for the small hit post-suggestion effect stored in the RAM 122. Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS617. The processes after step 121 IWS617 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 20-24.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is not dedicated after a small hit (N in step 121IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 resets (clears 0) the effect count counter (step 121IWS637). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS603. The processes after step 121IWS603 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 20-24.

In this example, after the end of the small hit game, a fixed fluctuation display for 30 seconds is performed over 3 fluctuations, and a series of post-small hit suggestion effects are executed for a total of 90 seconds. The number of fluctuations and the period to be executed are not limited to those shown in this example. For example, after the end of the small hit game, a fixed variation display for 20 seconds may be performed over 4 variations, and a series of post-small hit suggestion effects may be executed for a total of 80 seconds.

As described above, the feature unit 121IW includes the first invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092 describes that the display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and the process of displaying each character image of a giraffe, an elephant, or a lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when a special symbol changes, but it may be more periodic (at total variation, every predetermined variation, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by random number lottery, etc.). It is stated that it may be present. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the effect of the game cannot always be enhanced in the gaming machine configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value. .. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the set value.
A special state control means that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (for example, a portion that executes steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100).
With a specific effect executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps 121IWS1008 to S1011 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute a specific effect (for example, an effect by changing an effect stage) based on being controlled to the special state. Equipped with
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect at different execution ratios according to a set value (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is set in step 121IWS1009 as shown in FIGS. 20-38. Whether or not to change the production stage is determined at different rates depending on the value)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, control to a special state by a specific effect is performed. Can be noticed, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The special state control means can control a plurality of types of special states (for example, a small hit game state based on the small hit types A to C).
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect in a manner suggesting the set value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the setting value "1" is suggested by being changed to the effect stage A. The setting value "2" is suggested by changing to the effect stage B, and the setting value "3" is suggested by changing to the effect stage C).
Depending on the type of the controlled special state, the reliability of the suggestion of the set value by executing the specific effect differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type C). The suggestion of the set value by the effect stage changed later has the highest reliability, and the suggestion of the set value by the effect stage changed after the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type A has the lowest reliability. ing)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
The specific production execution means is
Depending on the mode in which the effect state is changed after the special state is completed, the specific effect may or may not be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the effect stage may or may not be changed). There is),
Depending on the set value, the ratio of executing the specific effect differs depending on the mode of shifting the effect state after the special state is finished (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the set value "1". -Depending on which of "3" it is, the ratio determined as no change or change of the production stage (change to production stage A, change to production stage B, change to production stage C) is different).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention,
Depending on the set value of the specific effect executing means, the ratio of executing the specific effect differs depending on the mode of shifting to the specific effect state among the plurality of types of effect states after ending the special state (for example, the figure). As shown in 20-38, it may be changed to the staging stage C only when the set value is "3").
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 5 of the first invention,
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern using variable display pattern determination data (for example, a variable pattern determination table) for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a variable display pattern). Step 121 (the part where steps 121IWS1101 to S1107 are executed) in
A variable display executing means (for example, a portion for executing steps 171 to 173 in the effect control CPU 120) for executing variable display according to the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
After finishing the special state, the variable display pattern determining means switches the variable display pattern determination data to determine the variable display pattern (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variable display pattern in step 121IWS1101 when it is Y, steps 121IWS1103 to S1107. To execute),
The specific effect executing means executes a series of specific effects in a manner suggesting a set value over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is set to Y in step 121IWS631 in steps 121IWS632 to S636). To execute)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention,
With an information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot during suggestion effect) based on the set value information input from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 121 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game according to the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be used. By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed.)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game in a gaming machine configured so that the control of the advantageous state can be executed based on the set value. can do.

Further, the feature unit 121IW includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092 describes that the display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and the process of displaying each character image of a giraffe, an elephant, or a lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when a special symbol changes, but it may be more periodic (at total variation, every predetermined variation, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by random number lottery, etc.). It is stated that it may be present. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the effect of the game cannot always be enhanced in the gaming machine configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value. .. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the set value.
In a specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, an effect by changing an effect stage) over a plurality of variable displays based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a small hit). Step 121 (part for executing IWS1008 to S1011)
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect at different execution ratios according to a set value (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is set in step 121IWS1009 as shown in FIGS. 20-38. Whether or not to change the production stage is determined at different rates depending on the value)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, a specific effect is produced over a plurality of variable displays. Is possible, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
A special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hit types A to C) different from the advantageous state is provided.
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect in a manner suggesting the set value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the setting value "1" is suggested by being changed to the effect stage A. The setting value "2" is suggested by changing to the effect stage B, and the setting value "3" is suggested by changing to the effect stage C).
Depending on the type of the controlled special state, the reliability of the suggestion of the set value by executing the specific effect differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type C). The suggestion of the set value by the effect stage changed later has the highest reliability, and the suggestion of the set value by the effect stage changed after the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type A has the lowest reliability. ing)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
A special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state is provided.
The specific production execution means is
Depending on the mode in which the effect state is changed after the special state is completed, the specific effect may or may not be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the effect stage may or may not be changed). There is),
Depending on the set value, the ratio of executing the specific effect differs depending on the mode of shifting the effect state after the special state is finished (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the set value "1". -Depending on which of "3" it is, the ratio determined as no change or change of the production stage (change to production stage A, change to production stage B, change to production stage C) is different).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
Depending on the set value of the specific effect executing means, the ratio of executing the specific effect differs depending on the mode of shifting to the specific effect state among the plurality of types of effect states after ending the special state (for example, the figure). As shown in 20-38, it may be changed to the staging stage C only when the set value is "3").
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
A special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state is provided.
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern using variable display pattern determination data (for example, a variable pattern determination table) for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a variable display pattern). Step 121 (the part where steps 121IWS1101 to S1107 are executed) in
A variable display executing means (for example, a portion for executing steps 171 to 173 in the effect control CPU 120) for executing variable display according to the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
After finishing the special state, the variable display pattern determining means switches the variable display pattern determination data to determine a variable display pattern (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variable display pattern in step 121IWS1101 when the time is Y, from step 121IWS1103 to Execute S1107),
The specific effect executing means executes a series of specific effects in a manner suggesting a set value over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is set to Y in step 121IWS631 in steps 121IWS632 to S636). To execute)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
With an information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot during suggestion effect) based on the set value information input from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 121 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game according to the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be used. By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed.)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game in a gaming machine configured so that the control of the advantageous state can be executed based on the set value. can do.

Further, the feature unit 121IW includes the third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092 describes that the display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and the process of displaying each character image of a giraffe, an elephant, or a lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when a special symbol changes, but it may be more periodic (at total variation, every predetermined variation, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by random number lottery, etc.). It is stated that it may be present. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the effect of the game cannot always be enhanced in the gaming machine configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value. .. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the set value.
It is equipped with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, look-ahead zone effect) over a predetermined period.
The effect can be executed so that the set value is suggested by satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a big hit) during the execution of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-28, the look-ahead zone effect). It is suggested that the set value is "1" if a big hit occurs during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect by the pattern 1, and the set value "2" if a big hit occurs during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect by the look-ahead zone effect pattern 2. If a big hit occurs during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect by the look-ahead zone effect pattern 3, it is suggested that the set value is "3").
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The effect executing means can execute the effect so that the suggested set values differ depending on at which timing during the execution of the specific effect the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-28). In addition, when the set value "1" is suggested in the second variable look-ahead zone effect and a big hit occurs, the accuracy of the set value "1" is high, and the set value "2" in the third variable look-ahead zone effect. Is suggested and the setting value is "2", the accuracy is high, and when the setting value "3" is suggested in the pre-reading zone effect of the 4th variation and the big hit is obtained, the setting value "3" The accuracy is high)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
A determination means for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state (for example, a portion for executing step 121 IWS 110 in the game control microcomputer 100) and
Prior to the determination by the determination means, a determination means for determining whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state (for example, a portion for executing step S101 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided.
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a look-ahead in the look-ahead advance notice setting process shown in FIGS. 20-20, based on a symbol designation command. (Determine the execution of zone production)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
With an information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot during suggestion effect) based on the set value information input from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 121 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game according to the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be used. By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed.)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game in a gaming machine configured so that the control of the advantageous state can be executed based on the set value. can do.

Further, the feature unit 121IW includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092 describes that the display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and the process of displaying each character image of a giraffe, an elephant, or a lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when a special symbol changes, but it may be more periodic (at total variation, every predetermined variation, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by random number lottery, etc.). It is stated that it may be present. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the effect of the game cannot always be enhanced in the gaming machine configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value. .. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the set value.
Motion detecting means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player, and
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, steps 121IWS603 to S605 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the suggestion effect during reach) that suggests the set set value is executed, and the suggestion effect during reach is performed in step 121IWS616. The part that selects the corresponding process table and executes steps 121IWS618 and S805) is provided.
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect by changing the suggested set value according to the motion detection means detecting the player's motion a plurality of times (for example, for effect control). CPU 120 executes steps 121IWS806 to S817)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
A reach effect executing means capable of executing a reach effect (for example, super reach) (for example, a portion where a process table corresponding to the super reach is selected in step 121IWS616 in the effect control CPU 120 and steps 121IWS618 and S805 are executed) is provided.
It is possible to execute the effect so that the reach effect to be executed changes stepwise (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-43 (C) to 20-44 (F), depending on the operation of the push button 31B. The panel images are erased one by one),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect by changing the setting value suggested at the timing when the reach effect to be executed changes stepwise (for example, FIGS. 20-43 (C) to 20-. As shown in 44 (F), the panel images displaying the icon images 121IW119 to 120 suggesting the set value are deleted one by one).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means may or may not execute the suggestion effect when the effect is executed so that the reach effect to be executed changes stepwise (for example, FIGS. 20-26 and 20-). As shown in 27, there are cases where icon patterns 2 to 9 in which the icon image is displayed are selected, and cases in which icon pattern 1 in which the icon image is not displayed is selected).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
The reliability of the reach effect differs depending on the combination of the set value suggested by the suggestion effect and the reach effect (for example, when the set value is "1" as shown in FIGS. 20-26 (A)). When icon pattern 2 is selected, it is confirmed that it is a big hit)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
Depending on the combination of the set value suggested by the suggestion effect and the reach effect, the reliability of the set value suggested by the suggestion effect differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-26 and 200-27, the supermarket. When the icon image by the icon pattern 9 is displayed in the reach, the expectation that the setting value is "3" is high).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
An information output means (for example, a portion for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepare,
The means of executing the suggestion effect is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information input from the information output means (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120). 121IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game according to the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be used. By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed.)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game in a gaming machine configured so that the control of the advantageous state can be executed based on the set value. can do.

Further, the feature unit 121IW includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the staging control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of effect patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value.
With an information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot during suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 121 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. As a matter of fact, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a portion that executes steps 121IWS512, S707, S904).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 121IWS031 and S108. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, the jackpot during the suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion for executing steps 121IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided.
The suggestion staging determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Step 121 IWS510, S705, S902 is executed based on the set value),
When the set value information is not input normally, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value "1") (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Executes steps 121IWS512, S707, S904 based on the set value "1")
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity.

In the feature unit 121IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect" is a concept including determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect and also determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect. be.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give a motivation to do the game and enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), 20-30 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the hobby of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) may be further provided, and according to such a configuration. , It is possible to confirm the suggestion production performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode in which the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect. A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Restricting means for limiting the execution of a predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-34 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). It is described that it may be provided with more difficult-to-use character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 12 of the fifth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulating member (for example, a curity cover 121IW500A / security cover 121IW500B / security cover 121IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is restricted by the restricting member, and the restricted state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 121IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is restricted, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open. The restricted state by the security cover 121IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is permitted. FIGS. 20-2, 20-3, 20-45 to 20-. 48)
It is stated that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.

The feature portion 121IW also includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the staging control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of effect patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value.
With an information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot during suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 121 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is set to N, S708 in step 121IWS513. When N is N in N, S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect are not executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 121IWS031 and S108. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give a motivation to do the game and enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), 20-30 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the hobby of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion staging execution means can execute the suggestion staging at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) may be further provided, and according to such a configuration. , It is possible to confirm the suggestion production performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode in which the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect. A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Restricting means for limiting the execution of a predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-34 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). It is described that it may be provided with more difficult-to-use character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the sixth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulating member (for example, a curity cover 121IW500A / security cover 121IW500B / security cover 121IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is restricted by the restricting member, and the restricted state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 121IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is restricted, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open. The restricted state by the security cover 121IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is permitted. FIGS. 20-2, 20-3, 20-45 to 20-. 48)
It is stated that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.

The feature portion 121IW also includes the seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the staging control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of effect patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value.
With an information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot during suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 121 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game according to the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestion effect cannot be executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example,). By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, S906, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 121IWS031 and S108. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, the jackpot during the suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion for executing steps 121IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided.
The suggestion staging determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Step 121 IWS510, S705, S902 is executed based on the set value),
When the set value information is not input normally, the dedicated determination data (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table) is used. The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table in step 121IWS514. , S709, S906)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give a motivation to do the game and enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), 20-30 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the hobby of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion staging execution means can execute the suggestion staging at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) may be further provided, and according to such a configuration. , It is possible to confirm the suggestion production performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode in which the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect. A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Restricting means for limiting the execution of a predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-34 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the seventh invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). It is described that it may be provided with more difficult-to-use character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the seventh invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the seventh invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 12 of the seventh invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulating member (for example, a curity cover 121IW500A / security cover 121IW500B / security cover 121IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is restricted by the restricting member, and the restricted state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 121IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is restricted, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open. The restricted state by the security cover 121IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is permitted. FIGS. 20-2, 20-3, 20-45 to 20-. 48)
It is stated that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.

It should be noted that the feature unit 121IW is configured so that it can be changed to three types of effect modes A to C, and when the effect mode A is controlled, if the set value information is not input normally, It is configured so that the suggestive effect can be executed as if it is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous for the player (the configuration of the above-mentioned fifth invention), and when it is controlled to the effect mode B, the set value. When the information is not input normally, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggestion effect (the configuration of the sixth invention described above), and when it is controlled to the effect mode C, the set value information is input normally. If not, the case where the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect is executably configured as the suggestion effect (the configuration of the above-mentioned seventh invention) is shown. Not limited. For example, the control method of the above-mentioned fifth invention to seventh invention may be used to switch whether to execute the suggestion effect according to the gaming state. In this case, for example, if the game state is the normal state and the set value information is not input normally, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect as if the set value is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous for the player. Configuration (configuration of the above-mentioned fifth invention), if the gaming state is a time-saving state, if the set value information is not input normally, the configuration is configured to limit the execution of the suggestion effect (the above-mentioned sixth invention). (Structure) If the game state is a probable change state, if the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (configuration). The above-mentioned configuration of the seventh invention) may be performed.

Further, it is not necessary to configure the suggestion staging executably by all the control methods of the fifth to seventh inventions shown above, and the suggestion staging is executably configured by using only one of the control methods. May be good.

Further, in the present feature unit 121IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as omission or garbled data, the execution of the suggestion effect is controlled by the control methods of the fifth to seventh inventions described above (suggestion). Although the case (restricting the production) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the setting value command may be received, but the suggestion effect may be restricted when the received setting value command is inconsistent. In this case, for example, each time a setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received by the staging control means side is stored, and then when a new setting value command is received, a new setting value command is received. If the set value indicated by the set value command received in the above does not match the set value stored in the previous time, it is determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and the suggestion effect is executed by the control method of the fifth to seventh inventions described above. It may be controlled (restricting the suggestion effect).

Further, the method of differentiating the games in each set value "1" to "3" is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, in the case of an odd-numbered setting value such as the set value "1" or "3", a series of villas (a continuous big hit occurs during a probable change state) is likely to occur and a series of villas occur. It is configured so that the difference from the difficult time is large, and in the case of an even numbered setting value such as the setting value "2", the setting value is configured so that the susceptibility to the consecutive villas is relatively constant and does not change. A suggestion effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be feasible. Then, in this case, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control method of the fifth to seventh inventions described above. It may be configured to (restrict the suggestion effect).

Further, the control method of the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value command shown in the above 5th to 7th inventions cannot be normally received includes the look-ahead zone effect as the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect during reach, and the effect stage. It is also possible to apply it to the production by changing.

The feature portion 121IW also includes the eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means has a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at least in a period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display at a different ratio depending on the set value. A game machine that is characterized by being able to execute (such as an initial roll effect) is described. It is possible to give motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of playing games.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of variablely displaying identification information for directing (for example, a decorative pattern).
In the suggestion effect executing means, different effect identification information is displayed according to the set value in the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display (for example, the suggestion effect (for example). It is stated that the display of odd-numbered initial rolls) may be made feasible, and such a configuration can enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 20). -23 (A), as shown in (B), a pre-game suggestion effect determination table with different determination values is used)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that suggests a set value after the variable display is started.
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may have a higher reliability for the suggested set value than the suggestion effect, and according to such a configuration, the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
An information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means is provided.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029).
It is described that the manufacturing cost may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 121IW also includes the ninth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 have a problem that they cannot effectively motivate them to play a game and cannot sufficiently enhance their interest. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), 20-30 (A), (B)).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern, and
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios depending on whether the set value is changed or not (for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (Fig. 20-6 (A),). B)),
It is described that the variable display executing means may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern, and
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times of execution of a reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect reaches a predetermined number, a specific super reach effect). The suggestion effect can be executed based on the fact that the advance notice effect has been executed, etc. (for example, when a big hit occurs within a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit can be executed). A), (B))
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
An information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means is provided.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 121IW also includes the tenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092, there is a problem that the suggestive staging executed in the past cannot be confirmed and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B), etc.).
A gaming machine is described that further comprises a notification means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) capable of transmitting information regarding the executed suggestion effect. According to this feature. , It is possible to confirm the suggestion production performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggestion effect is executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 4 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify information about the executed suggestion effect while waiting for a customer for which the variable display is not executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
An information generation means for generating information (for example, execution history information) regarding the executed suggestion effect, and
An image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by an image pickup device, and an image generation means.
It is described that the specific image may be provided with a display means (for example, an image display device 5) for displaying the specific image in a manner that can be captured by the image pickup device. Can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
An information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means is provided.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 121IW also includes the eleventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 has a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to be recognized by other effects, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode in which the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect. A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Further provided with limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. FIG. 20-34. See (D)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eleventh invention,
The limiting means changes at least one of the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, one of them is executed during the fanfare period and the other is the ending). Change to run during the period)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eleventh invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is prohibited. See FIG. 20-34 (D). )
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eleventh invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means executes a predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 121IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the usual one (for example, suggestion during a big hit). Control so that it does not stop at the position where it overlaps with the dialogue image due to the production))
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eleventh invention,
Both the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include a display in one display means (for example, the image display device 5).
It is described that the above-mentioned one display means may display the display related to the suggestive effect with priority over the display related to the predetermined effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the interest. Can be done.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
An information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means is provided.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 121IW also includes the twelfth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 has a problem that the setting suggestion effect that is not preferable for the player may be executed, which may reduce the interest. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is equipped with a setting suggestion execution means that can execute a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). A game machine that is characterized by being further equipped with a character effect that makes it difficult to produce, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.) is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a character effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 121IW101), and according to such a configuration. , The effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
A light guide plate having translucency capable of transmitting light (for example, a light guide plate 121IW103) and
It is provided with a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end surface of the light guide plate.
The light guide plate is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitting body and emits it to the front surface of the gaming machine.
The predetermined notification means is capable of executing predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) in which light is emitted from the reflective portion provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. It is described that it is also good, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing the predetermined notification for displaying an error, and according to such a configuration, the error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means includes the first setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion staging of the first staging mode. See FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B)), which suggests that the setting is set to the first set value. A second setting suggestion suggesting that the second set value is set to a second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value (for example, a jackpot suggestion effect of the third effect mode. FIG. 20-34 (Fig. 20-34). A), (see (B)) and can be executed,
When the first setting suggestion is executed, the predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate than when the second setting suggestion is executed (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (E)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
It is equipped with a setting suggestion setting means that can set the execution ratio of the setting suggestion (for example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the operation means such as the push button 31B and the operation means (management) such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine. It is possible to change the settings related to the setting suggestion effect by operating (only the person can operate).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine that displays variable identification information.
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which the identification information is arranged is provided.
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed.
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed. According to such a configuration, the predetermined notification means may be executed. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
An information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means is provided.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 121IW also includes the thirteenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the thirteenth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the thirteenth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the thirteenth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the thirteenth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the thirteenth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value adding means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (for example, FIGS. 20-5 (A), (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting a set value (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) may be provided in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the thirteenth invention,
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means enables a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) to be executed regardless of a set value in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. It is described that the configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the thirteenth invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be predetermined according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the thirteenth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can control multiple types of advantageous states.
The game control means can be controlled to one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
An information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means is provided.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 121IW also includes the 14th invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the 14th invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the 14th invention,
The variable display period differs depending on the set value (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the 14th invention,
It is stated that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may differ depending on the set value set, and with such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the 14th invention,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value adding means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period for the variable display is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the 14th invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be predetermined according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the 14th invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern, and
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to a set value (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the 14th invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
An information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means is provided.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 121IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by other feature units such as the feature unit 31AK to configure the gaming machine. For example, when executing the look-ahead zone effect, the in-reach suggestion effect, the effect by changing the effect stage, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect shown in the feature unit 121IW, the look-ahead zone effect or reach. When a predetermined period has passed from the start of the medium suggestion effect, the effect by changing the effect stage, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit medium suggestion effect, the look-ahead zone effect and the reach suggestion in the same manner as the feature section 31AK. The title corresponding to the effect, the effect by changing the effect stage, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect may be configured to be noticeable.

(Explanation of feature unit 136IW)
Next, the feature unit 136IW will be described. FIG. 21-1 is a block diagram showing an example of a magnetic detector, a setting board, and a main board. As shown in FIG. 21-1, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 are connected to the main board 11 via the setting board 136IW300. The first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 are sensors for detecting an unauthorized operation using a magnet outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, and when an external magnetic field due to the unauthorized operation is detected, the game control is performed. An error signal is output to the magnetic computer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives an error signal, it uses an image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and a communication unit capable of communicating with the hall management computer to play pachinko to managers such as hall staff. An abnormality notification process for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine 1 is executed.

For example, in the game control microcomputer 100, in the error processing on the main side in step S22, the error signal from the first magnetic detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101 corresponds to the magnetic field detection (magnet detection) (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100). Check if it is at high level). Hereinafter, the state in which the error signal is in a state corresponding to magnetic field detection (magnet detection) is referred to as an error signal being output, and the error signal is in a state corresponding to magnetic field undetected (magnet not detected) (for example). , Low level) means that no error signal is output.

If an error signal is output, an abnormality notification process is executed to notify that an abnormality has been detected. In the feature unit 136IW, as an abnormality notification process, the game control microcomputer 100 displays, for example, an image indicating "magnet discovery" or an image indicating abnormality detection on the image display device 5 on the effect control board 12. Take control. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 causes the staging control board 12 to output sound number data corresponding to the abnormality notification sound to the voice control board 130, and outputs the abnormality notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 performs a process of transmitting information including identification information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which an abnormality is detected to the hall management computer via the communication unit in the information output process of step S23. conduct.

If a magnet that may be used for fraudulent activity such as illegally guiding a game ball to the winning area or a magnet that is used for fraudulent activity is found by the above abnormality notification processing, In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 displays a state indicating an abnormality, and the speakers 8L and 8R output an abnormality notification sound. Then, a report is also made to the hall management computer.

As the abnormality notification processing to be executed when the error signal is output from the first magnetic detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101, the abnormality notification is performed using only the image display device 5, or the speaker 8L. It is possible to adopt an appropriate form such as performing an abnormality notification using only 8R. Further, it is possible to perform abnormality notification using another effect device (for example, a light emitting body such as an LED), and to use an image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and another effect device (for example, a light emitting body such as an LED). May be used together.

Further, in the feature unit 136IW, this abnormality notification processing is executed by the game control microcomputer 100, but the abnormality notification processing has a configuration other than the game control microcomputer 100 such as the staging control microcomputer 100. It may be used and executed.

In this feature unit 136IW, when an error signal is output from the first magnetic detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101, the abnormality notification process continues until a predetermined release operation is performed by an administrator such as a hall staff. Is executed. In addition to this, the abnormality notification process is continuously executed until the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, or when the output of the error signal from the first magnetic detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101 is lost. It is possible to adopt various continuation forms such as (when the error signal becomes a state corresponding to the magnetic field not detected (magnet not detected)) and the abnormality notification is terminated.

In the feature unit 136IW, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 are set to supply power to the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101, and to set the effective detection direction. The setting board 136IW300 for the purpose is connected. Although the feature unit 136IW is configured to provide two magnetic detectors, it may be configured to provide one magnetic detector or to provide three or more magnetic detectors. It is also good.

In the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 of the feature unit 136IW, two of the six surfaces (first mounting surface S1 and second mounting surface S2) formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape are pachinko gaming machines. It can be used as a mounting surface for 1. The selection of the mounting surface (selection of the mounting mode) is selected according to the situation on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which differs depending on the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this feature unit 136IW, when one of the two mounting surfaces is selected, the mounting area for the pachinko gaming machine 1 (corresponding to the area of the mounting surface) and the protrusion amount of the magnetic detector on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since the lead-out direction of the cable led out from the cable lead-out hole of the magnetic detector is different, it is possible to cope with the situation on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Here, the coordinate system is defined for the magnetic detector. The x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis that are orthogonal to each other are defined so that the first mounting surface S1 is parallel to the xy plane and the second mounting surface S2 is parallel to the zx plane.

The first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 of the feature unit 136IW can detect the x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis orthogonal to each other as the magnetic detection direction. Specifically, the x-axis sensor mounted on the magnetic detector detects magnetism in the x-axis direction, the y-axis sensor detects magnetism in the y-axis direction, and the z-axis sensor detects magnetism in the z-axis direction. To detect. The magnetic detector of the feature unit 136IW can set two of the x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis as effective detection directions. That is, it is possible to set any of the xy plane and the zx plane as an effective plane for detecting magnetism. The setting of the effective plane in the feature unit 136IW is realized by the circuit configuration (hardware specification) of the setting board 136IW300, but the setting of the effective plane is also realized by the setting board 136IW300 or the mechanical switch provided in the magnetic detector. It is possible to adopt various forms such as performing by switching (hard specification), performing by program processing of the game control microcomputer 100, the effect control microcomputer 100, or the like (software specification).

FIG. 21-2 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the first magnetic detector 136IW100 together with the setting board 136IW300 and the main board 11. Note that FIG. 21-2 shows only the configuration of the first magnetic detector 136IW100, but the configuration of the second magnetic detector 136IW101 is the same as that of the first magnetic detector 136IW100, so that the illustration is omitted. ing. Hereinafter, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 are collectively referred to simply as a magnetic detector.

As shown in FIG. 21-2, in the feature unit 136IW, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 includes a magnetic detection element 136IW110 and a control circuit 136IW120. The control circuit 136IW120 includes an AD converter 136IW121 and a control unit 136IW122. The AD converter 136IW121 converts the detection voltage, which is an analog signal output by the magnetic detection element 136IW110, into a digital signal. Further, the control circuit 136IW120 can execute the averaging process, the reference value setting process, the effective surface setting process, and the comparison process. For the control circuit 136IW120, a microcontroller that performs a control operation according to a program can be used. When a microcontroller is used as the control circuit 136IW120, each of the above-mentioned processes is realized by a program.

The magnetic detection element 136IW110 detects a change in impedance due to a magnetic field applied from the outside to an amorphous wire arranged along three axes (x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis) orthogonal to each other, and is based on each change amount. The configuration is such that the detection voltage is output, and the control circuit 136IW120 has a function of outputting a channel signal to the magnetic detection element 136IW110. Which of the x-axis detection element (x-axis sensor), y-axis detection element (y-axis sensor), and z-axis detection element (z-axis sensor) the detection voltage is output from the channel signal? It is a signal for selecting.

The averaging process is a process of averaging the detected voltage values output by the first magnetic detector 136IW100 over time. The reference value setting process is a process of setting a reference value for detecting the amount of change in the combined magnetic field based on the detection voltage output by the first magnetic detector 136IW100. The effective surface setting process is a process of setting an effective plane having two axes in the effective detection direction among the three axes of the magnetic detection direction output by the magnetic detection element 136IW110. In this feature unit 136IW, one of the two planes parallel to the xy plane and the zx plane is set as an effective plane according to the mounting mode of the magnetic detector. The comparison process is a process of outputting an error signal to the game control microcomputer 100 when the amount of change in the synthetic magnetic field on the effective plane exceeds the threshold value for determining fraud detection using a magnet.

As shown in FIG. 21-2, in the feature unit 136IW, when the magnetic detector CLRT signal is input from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), the setting board 136IW 300 is supplied from the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1. The power supply voltage is supplied to each magnetic detector (first magnetic detector 136IW100 and second magnetic detector 136IW101) based on the supplied power supply voltage, and each magnetic detector (first magnetic detector 136IW100 and second magnetic) is supplied. It has a function to output a selection signal Sa for selecting an effective detection direction corresponding to the detector 136IW101). In other words, the setting board 136IW300 has each magnetic detector if the magnetic detector CLRT signal is not input from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The power supply voltage is not supplied to, and the selection signal Sa is not output.

The setting board 136IW300 is connected to each magnetic detector (first magnetic detector 136IW100 and second magnetic detector 136IW101) based on the input of the magnetic detector CLRT signal from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100). It is configured with a transistor that switches the supply of the power supply voltage from the off state to the on state. Further, the setting board 136IW300 sets the power supply voltage to each magnetic detector (first magnetic detector 136IW100 and second magnetic detector) based on the input of the magnetic detector CLRT signal from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100). It is configured to have a circuit that converts and outputs a selection signal Sa according to the setting of the device 136IW101). Although the capacity of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 is limited on the main board 11, the feature unit 136IW sets various settings of each magnetic detector (first magnetic detector 136IW100 and second magnetic detector 136IW101) on the board 136IW300. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the game control microcomputer 100.

Since the feature unit 136IW is configured to supply power to a plurality of magnetic detectors based on the input of one magnetic detector CLRT signal, it is possible to suppress the increase of parts and to play games. The processing load on the control microcomputer 100 and the like can be reduced. Not limited to the configuration example shown by the feature unit 136IW, in order to individually control the power supply of a plurality of magnetic detectors, a plurality of transistors capable of switching the power supply voltage supply between the on state and the off state are provided. It may be. In this case, the magnetic detector CLRT signal may be input individually to each transistor, or when one magnetic detector CLRT signal is input, the supply of the power supply voltage to the corresponding magnetic detector of each transistor is turned off. It may be configured to switch from the state to the on state.

In this feature unit 136IW, when the supply of the power supply voltage to each magnetic detector (first magnetic detector 136IW100 and second magnetic detector 136IW101) is switched from the off state to the on state, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied. The on state is continued until it is stopped. For example, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened after the supply of the power supply voltage to each magnetic detector is turned on, each magnetism is temporarily turned on. The control to switch the supply of the power supply voltage to the detector from the on state to the off state may be performed, or the control may be performed so that the error signal is not output from each magnetic detector, or the error signal is output. Even if it is done, the control may be performed so that the abnormality notification process is not performed. Such control can be realized by performing program processing (software specifications) such as the game control microcomputer 100 and the staging control microcomputer 100. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inappropriate abnormality notification from being performed due to a change in the magnetic field due to the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3.

Further, in this feature unit 136IW, the magnetic detector CLRT signal is output by the program processing (software specification) of the game control microcomputer 100, and each magnetic detector (first magnetic detector 136IW100 and second magnetic detector 136IW101) is output. The supply of the power supply voltage to) can be switched from the off state to the on state, but other configurations may be adopted. For example, the output signal from the door opening sensor 136IW090 and the setting key 136IW051 (details will be described later) of the feature unit 136IW is input to the main board 11, but this is branched and input to the setting board 136IW300 as well. When both the door open sensor 136IW090 and the setting key 136IW051 are in the off state, the power supply voltage is supplied to each magnetic detector (first magnetic detector 136IW100 and second magnetic detector 136IW101) on the setting board 136IW300. It may be a circuit configuration (hardware specification) to be turned on. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the game control microcomputer 100.

In this feature unit 136IW, the power supply to each magnetic detector is controlled by the setting board 136IW300, but other parts (for example, solenoids 81 and 82, a motor for driving the movable body 32, various switches, etc.) are controlled. Specifically, it may be configured to control the power supply to the solenoid (34V), the motor (12V, 15V, 18V, 20V), the switch (12V), etc.). That is, the setting board 136IW300 that controls the power supply does not have to be dedicated to the magnetic detector. In this feature unit 136IW, the voltage supplied to the magnetic detector is divided by control parts such as transistors of the setting board 136IW300, but the voltage supplied to the magnetic detector is different from other parts (for example, solenoids 81 and 82 and movable). It is the same as the voltage supplied to the motor (such as a motor for driving the body 32).

In this feature unit 136IW, the power supply to the magnetic detector is controlled by the route of the main board 11 → the relay board having a function of controlling the power supply (in this example, the setting board 136IW300) → the magnetic detector. However, the power supply to the magnetic detector is controlled by the route of main board 11 → power supply board having a function of controlling power supply → main board 11 (or relay board) → magnetic detector, not limited to such a configuration. It may be configured to be used. Specifically, in the power supply board, after changing from an AC power supply (AC24V) to a DC voltage (DC34V), a power supply for the magnetic detector may be directly created, and at that time, the main board 11 may be transferred to the power supply board. On the other hand, a control signal may be output. That is, when a control signal is input from the main board 11 to the power supply board, the power supply for the magnetic detector created in the power supply board may be supplied to the magnetic detector. Further, when controlling the generation of the dedicated voltage on the power supply board from the main board 11, not only the magnetic detector but also various switches for detecting the game ball and a vibration sensor for detecting the vibration of the game machine. , The power supply to the solenoid, motor, etc. may be controlled. In this case, power is supplied to the target component when it is desired to control the operation in terms of the progress and control of the game.

21-3 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the magnetic detector, and FIG. 21-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the function of the input / output unit (input / output terminal) terminal of the magnetic detector. The first magnetic detector 136IW100 of the feature unit 136IW is a device including a magnetic detection element 136IW110 and a control circuit 136IW120. In the example shown in FIG. 21-3, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 stabilizes the magnetic detection element 136IW110, the control circuit 136IW120, and the + 12V voltage input from the outside and supplies the magnetic detection element 136IW110 and the control circuit 136IW120. The regulator 136IW183, the buffer circuit 136IW186 for inputting the selection signal Sa (input from SELECT) and outputting to the control circuit 136IW120, and the output transistor 136IW184 for outputting the error signal are included.

In this feature unit 136IW, the selection signal Sa includes Hi (for example, power supply voltage 12 [V]) and Low (for example, 0 [V] GND), and Hi (for example, power supply voltage 12 [V]) is connected to the SELECT terminal. ) When the selection signal Sa is supplied, the power supply to the 12V terminal is configured to supply the same power supply as the controlled power supply. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the wiring from becoming complicated. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the configuration example of the feature unit 136IW, and a dedicated power supply may be provided for each. With such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the effect of improving the detection accuracy of the magnetic detector and the effect of suppressing the occurrence of malfunction.

In this feature unit 136IW, the software of the microcontroller that realizes the control circuit 136IW120 eliminates variations in sensor characteristics and the influence of geomagnetism. Specifically, when the power supply to the magnetic detector is started, the detection voltage is input from the magnetic detection element 136IW110, and the reference value is set based on the input detection voltage. Then, the amount of change (combined magnetic field change amount) from the reference value of the detection voltage from the magnetic detector is calculated for the effective plane, and when the amount of change exceeds the threshold value, a magnet exists in the vicinity of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Judgment is made and an error signal is output. By appropriately correcting the set reference value, it may be possible to cope with changes in the environment due to magnetism of electromagnetic parts and the like.

FIG. 21-5 is a block diagram showing a control configuration example of the control unit 136IW122. The control circuit 136IW120 of the feature unit 136IW includes a magnetic field change amount calculation unit 136IW202x, 202y, 202z corresponding to the x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis, a composite vector calculation unit 136IW233, and a magnetic field detection unit 136IW234. ing. The magnetic field change amount calculation unit 136IW202x, 202y, 202z executes a monitoring process for monitoring the magnetic field change amount (change in the ambient magnetic field) in each axial direction based on the output of the magnetic detection element 136IW110. The composite vector calculation unit 136IW233 calculates the composite magnetic field change amount in the plane composed of the two axes based on the magnetic field change amount in each axial direction. The magnetic field detection unit 136IW234 performs a detection process of comparing the combined magnetic field change amount in a certain plane (plane set by the selection signal Sa) with the threshold value and outputting an error signal indicating an invalid magnetic field change when the threshold value is exceeded. Run. In the feature unit 136IW, the monitoring process and the detection process are executed by the control unit 136IW122 in the magnetic detector in this way. Instead of such a form, any one of the monitoring process and the detection process may be performed by a process other than the magnetic detector. When it is performed by a device other than the magnetic detector, it may be executed by a game control microcomputer 100 in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a staging control microcomputer 100, or the like.

The magnetic field change amount calculation unit 136IW202x, 202y, 202z calculates a reference value for the detected voltage values of the x-axis sensor, the y-axis sensor, and the z-axis sensor, respectively, and calculates the current detected voltage value (averaged detected voltage value). The amount of change in the magnetic field, which is the difference between the value and the reference value, is calculated for each axis. FIG. 21-5 shows a configuration example of the magnetic field change amount calculation unit 136IW202x for the x-axis, but the magnetic field change amount calculation units 136IW202y and 202z for the y-axis and z-axis are the magnetic field change amount calculation unit 136IW202x. It is the same as the configuration example of.

The control unit 136IW122 sequentially selects data output from the x-axis sensor, the y-axis sensor, and the z-axis sensor and digitized by the AD converter 136IW121 in a cycle of 2 ms. That is, x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis data are input to the control unit 136IW122 every 2 ms. The data of each axis is input to the corresponding magnetic field change amount calculation unit 136IW202x to 202z, and the magnetic field change amount is calculated for each axis.

The data input to the magnetic field change amount calculation unit 136IW202x is stored in the register 136IW251, and is sequentially shifted and transferred to the registers 136IW252 to 258 of the next stage every 2 ms. The data stored in the register 258 in the final stage is discarded every time new data is shifted and transferred. The first averaging unit 136IW203 averages the data stored in the registers 136IW251 to 258 to time-average the data output by the x-axis sensor. The feature unit 136IW eliminates the detection of momentary magnetic field changes by averaging the data in this way over time.

The reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204 shown in FIG. 21-5 calculates a reference value when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of power supply to the magnetic detector. Specifically, the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204 sequentially shifts and transfers the data output by the first averaging unit 136IW203 to the registers 136IW261 to 268 (not shown) of the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204 and stores the data. Since the first averaging unit 136IW203 outputs data every 2 ms, the data is stored in all the registers 136IW261 to 268 after 14 ms has elapsed. The second averaging unit 136IW273 (not shown) of the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204 averages the data stored in the registers 136IW261 to 268 and outputs the data as a reference value.

The subtraction unit 136IW205 shown in FIG. 21-5 subtracts the reference value output by the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204 from the current value output by the first averaging unit 136IW203, and the value obtained by taking the absolute value is the magnetic field for each axis. Calculated as the amount of change. The calculated magnetic field change amount for each axis is output to the composite vector calculation unit 136IW233. Therefore, the amount of change in the magnetic field (absolute value of the change in the magnetic field with respect to the reference value) is input to the composite vector calculation unit 136IW233. The control unit 136IW122 also executes the same processing for the output of the y-axis sensor and the z-axis sensor as for the output of the x-axis sensor. Therefore, the amount of change in the magnetic field with respect to the three axes (x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis) is input to the composite vector calculation unit 136IW233.

The composite vector calculation unit 136IW233 calculates the composite magnetic field change amount for the set of x-axis and y-axis, y-axis and z-axis, and z-axis and x-axis from the input values of the three magnetic field changes. For example, the combined magnetic field change amount of a set of x-axis and y-axis is calculated as the square root of the sum of the square of the magnetic field change amount of the x-axis and the square of the magnetic field change amount of the y-axis. That is, it is the amount of change in the combined magnetic field in the xy plane. By performing the same calculation for the other two sets (y-axis and z-axis, z-axis and x-axis), the amount of change in the combined magnetic field in the yz plane and the zx plane, respectively, is calculated. The calculated combined magnetic field change amount for each plane (xy plane, yz plane, zx plane) is output to the magnetic field detection unit 136IW234.

The magnetic field detection unit 136IW234 detects the presence or absence of an illegal magnetic field generated by an unauthorized operation by a magnet from the outside (the side of the glass door frame 2) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When an erratic magnetic field is detected, the magnetic field detection unit 136IW234 outputs an error signal to the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11. In the feature unit 136IW, the magnetic field detection unit 136IW234 realizes the effective surface setting function. The effective surface setting function is a function of setting an effective plane having two axes in the effective detection direction among the three axes of the magnetic detection direction output by the magnetic detection element 136IW110. In this feature unit 136IW, one of the two planes of the xy plane and the zx plane is set as an effective plane according to the mounting mode of the magnetic detector.

With the start of power supply to the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply voltage is started to be applied to the setting board 136IW300, and the magnetic detector CLRT signal is output from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) to the setting board 136IW300. Then, the setting board 136IW300 supplies the power supply voltage to the terminal (12V) of the first magnetic detector 136IW100, and also supplies a predetermined selection signal Sa generated based on the power supply voltage to the terminal of the first magnetic detector 136IW100. Supply to (SELECT). The control circuit 136IW120 of the first magnetic detector 136IW100 sets an effective plane having two axes of effective detection directions based on the selection signal Sa. The magnetic field detection unit 136IW234 uses, among the three synthetic magnetic field changes output from the synthetic vector calculation unit 136IW233, one synthetic magnetic field change amount corresponding to the effective plane for determination.

In the feature unit 136IW, the control circuit 136IW120 sets an effective plane having two axes of effective detection directions according to the input selection signal Sa. When the selection signal Sa indicates Hi (for example, power supply voltage), the x-axis and y-axis of the magnetic detector are set as the effective detection direction (the xy plane is the effective plane), and the z-axis direction is set as the invalid axis. When the selection signal Sa indicates Low (for example, 0 [V] GND), the z-axis and x-axis of the magnetic detector are set as the effective detection direction (zx plane is the effective plane), and the y-axis direction is set as the invalid axis. do.

As described above, in the feature unit 136IW, the effective plane having the effective detection directions of the two axes is set by the selection signal Sa generated based on the power supply to the setting board 136IW300. The effective plane may be set not only by using the setting board 136IW300 as in the feature unit 136IW, but also by controlling the magnetic detector by the main board 11 or the staging control board 12.

The magnetic field detection unit 136IW234 compares the synthetic magnetic field change amount corresponding to the effective plane selected based on the selection signal Sa with the threshold value, and when the synthetic magnetic field change amount exceeds the threshold value, the game control microcomputer 100 is used. It has a comparison function that outputs an error signal.

(Change and confirmation of set value in feature unit 136IW)
Next, the change and confirmation of the set value in the feature unit 136IW will be described. In the feature unit 136IW, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, the main board 11 functions as a setting key 136IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a setting switch for changing a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) in the setting change state. A setting changeover switch 136IW052 is provided.

The setting changeover main body portion provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the setting key 136IW051 and the setting changeover switch 136IW052 is housed in the board case together with the main board 11, and the setting key 136IW051 and the setting changeover switch 136IW052 It is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right part of the back of the board case so that it can be operated without opening the board case.

Since the board case having the setting key 136IW051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key 136IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the setting key 136IW051. The setting key 136IW051 is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation. Although the feature unit 136IW illustrates a form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

(Game control main processing in feature unit 136IW)
21-6 and 21-7 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the feature unit 136IW. In the feature unit 136IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 controls to turn off the output of the magnetic detector CTRL signal to the setting board 136IW300 (that is, does not output the magnetic detector CTRL signal) (step S136IWS002a).

By executing the process of step S136IWS002a, the feature unit 136IW does not immediately output the magnetic detector CTRL signal to the setting board 136IW300 even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the power supply to the magnetic detector is immediately started, and the reference value is not set in the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting for the start of the staging control means for measuring the time until the staging control means (specifically, the staging control CPU 120) starts when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. (Step 136IWS003). In this case, a sufficient time is set in the effect control means activation waiting timer from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 136IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 136IWS005). If the value of the effect control means start wait timer is not 0, the process returns to step 136IWS004 and the processes of steps 136IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 136IWS006.

Next, the CPU 103 clears, for example, a factory-factory setting flag indicating that the RAM 102 has the factory-factory setting (for example, this flag is cleared even if the RAM clear processes 1 and 2 and the recovery process described later are executed. (Cleared when the setting change process described later is executed) is set so that it is not set, and in step 136IWS006, it is confirmed whether or not this factory setting flag is set. do it. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, a value indicating that the factory setting value is left as it is (for example, "0" or "-") is set as a set value, and the value of the set value is set in step 136IWS006. May be checked to see if it remains at the factory value. If the factory setting remains the same (step 136IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 136IWS006; Yes), that is, if the setting value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as in step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is stored (step 136IWS007). Specifically, in step 136IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 136IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 136IWS010.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 136IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 136IWS008). In step 136IWS008, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 136IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 136IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 136IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is being changed is set (step 136IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 136IWS009; No), that is, if a power failure occurs during the change of the setting value and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the process proceeds to step 136IWS010.

In step 136IWS010, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 136IWS010).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 136IW090 is on (step 136IWS011). If the output signal from the door open sensor 136IW090 is on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 136IW051 is on (step 136IWS012). If the setting key 136IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 136IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process (step 136IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the performance display such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is cleared. Information is not cleared and is retained. Further, in the RAM clear 1 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 136IWS027.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 136IW090 is off (that is, when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state. N in step 136IWS011), or when the setting key 136IW051 is off (N in step 136IWS012). ), When the output signal from the clear switch is off (N in step 136IWS013), the process does not proceed to step 136IWS014 but proceeds to loop processing.

By executing the processes of steps 136IWS006 to S014, in the feature unit 136IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in steps 136IWS007, S008), or when the factory setting is left as it is (step 136IWS007, S008). In the case of 136IWS006 Y), if a power failure occurs during the setting change (Y in step 136IWS009), the setting key 136IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 3 open. The RAM is cleared on condition that the setting value can be changed after step 136IWS027. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the setting key 136IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and the gaming control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 136IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 136IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 136IW090 is on (step 136IWS016). If the output signal from the door open sensor 136IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 136IW051 is on (step 136IWS017). If the setting key 136IW051 is on, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process start command indicating that the setting confirmation process is started to the effect control board 12 (step 136IWS018).

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation process start command, it controls to notify that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or a decorative illuminant such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner). In this case, the effect control board 12 may be configured to display "maintenance mode" or the like and shift to the maintenance mode by pressing an operation button for effect such as the push button 31B. "Maintenance mode" is, for example, real-time clock date and time setting, error occurrence history (recording when and what kind of error occurred), setting change history (when the set value was changed or after the change). This mode allows you to check the recording of the set value). When the setting key 136IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also terminated.

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step 136IWS019). In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor. Then, while the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state and the setting key 136IW051 is on, the set value is displayed on the display monitor. If the setting key 136IW051 is not on and the output signal from the door open sensor 136IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation process ends.

When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 136IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped by the same process as in step S6. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process end command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed to the effect control board 12 (step 136IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 136IWS034a.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 136IW090 is not on (N in step 136IWS016) or when the setting key 136IW051 is not on (N in step 136IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S6. (Step 136IWS022) is performed to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 by the same process as in step S7 (step 136IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 136IWS034b.

If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 136IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the ratio and the connection ratio are cleared. Information for performance display such as role ratio and base, and information on set values are not cleared and are retained.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 136IW090 is on (step 136IWS025). If the output signal from the door open sensor 136IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 136IW051 is on (step 136IWS026). If the setting key 136IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets the setting changing flag (step 136IWS027).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change processing start command indicating that the setting change processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 136IWS028). When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting change processing start command, it controls to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or a decorative illuminant such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process (step 136IWS029). In the setting change process, the CPU 103 specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor. Next, if the output signal from the setting changeover switch 136IW052 is on, the CPU 103 updates and displays the setting value displayed on the display monitor. Further, the set value (updated set value) displayed on the display monitor is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updated and stored with respect to the already stored set value). Then, if the setting key 136IW051 is not on and the output signal from the door opening sensor 136IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

When the setting change process is completed, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 136IWS030). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control board 12 (step 136IWS031). Further, a setting change processing end command indicating that the setting change processing is completed is transmitted to the staging control board 12 (step 136IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 136IWS034a.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 136IW090 is not on (N in step 136IWS025) or when the setting key 136IW051 is not on (N in step 136IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S9. (Step S136IWS033) transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12. Then, the process proceeds to step 136IWS034b.

In step S136IW034a, the value of the waiting period timer in which the predetermined waiting period (for example, 30 seconds) is set is subtracted by 1, and it is confirmed whether or not the value of the waiting period timer after the subtraction is 0. If the value of the wait period timer is not 0, the process of step S136IW034a is repeatedly executed. If the value of the wait period timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 136IWS034b.

In step S136IW034b, the CPU 103 controls to turn on the output of the magnetic detector CTRL signal to the setting board 136IW300 (that is, to output the magnetic detector CTRL signal) (step S136IWS034b). After that, the processes of steps IWS035 to S037 are performed, and these processes are the same as the processes of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

The feature unit 136IW can output the magnetic detector CTRL signal to the setting board 136IW300 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, but the processing of step S136IWS002a and step S136IWS034b is executed. , When the gaming machine frame 3 is open (or when the setting confirmation processing or setting change processing is performed), at least until the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (or the setting confirmation processing or setting change processing). Until the processing is completed), the magnetic detector CTRL signal for the setting board 136IW300 is not output. That is, at least until the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (or until the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is completed), the power supply to the magnetic detector is started, and the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204 determines an illegal magnetic field. No reference value is set for this. With such a configuration, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming machine frame 3 is open (or the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is being performed). It is possible to prevent a reference value for determining an erratic magnetic field from being set, that is, an inappropriate reference value from being set.

Further, by executing the process of step S136IWS034a, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (or the setting confirmation process) in the feature unit 136IW. Alternatively, if the setting change process is being performed), after the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (or after the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is completed), the setting board 136IW300 is used until a predetermined waiting period elapses. No magnetic detector CTRL signal is output for. That is, after the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (or after the setting confirmation process or setting change process is completed), power supply to the magnetic detector is started until a predetermined standby period elapses, and the reference magnetic field is set. A reference value for determining an irregular magnetic field is not set in the unit 136IW204. With such a configuration, although the open gaming machine frame 3 is closed, even if the operation of opening the frame again and then closing the frame 3 is performed because the frame 3 is half-opened or the like, the frame 3 is closed by the time it is firmly closed. Since a sufficient period is secured as a waiting period and the reference value is set after the waiting period has elapsed, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate reference value from being set.

The feature unit 136IW is configured so that the gaming machine frame 3 needs to be opened in order to change or confirm the set value, but the setting is made even if the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened. Even when the configuration is such that the value can be changed or confirmed, the magnetic detector CTRL signal for the setting board 136IW300 is not output until a predetermined standby period elapses after the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is completed. By setting, even if the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and closed after the setting value is changed or confirmed, a sufficient period until it is closed is secured as a waiting period, and an inappropriate reference value is set. Can be prevented.

FIG. 21-8 shows a time chart showing the relationship between the detection of magnetic changes by the magnetic detector and various signals. This time chart shows the state of the x-axis magnetic change detected by the magnetic detector. The magnetic change detected by the magnetic detector also changes on the y-axis and the z-axis, but the illustration here is omitted.

FIG. 21-8 (A) shows a time chart showing the relationship between the detection of magnetic changes by a magnetic detector with a general configuration and various signals, and FIG. 21-8 (B) shows this feature. A time chart showing the relationship between the detection of magnetic changes by the magnetic detector according to the configuration of the unit 136IW and various signals is shown.

Here, the general configuration is a configuration in which the power supply to the magnetic detector is started when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and the reference value for determining the illegal magnetic field is set. The configuration of the feature unit 136IW is that the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is performed when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (or the gaming machine frame 3 is open). In the case), the reference value for determining the illegal magnetic field is not set until the predetermined waiting period elapses after the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is completed (or after the gaming machine frame 3 is closed). It is a composition.

In the example of the general configuration shown in FIG. 21-8 (A), when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (t1), the power supply to the magnetic detector is started and the selection signal is started. Sa is input. Then, in the magnetic detector, a reference value for determining an irregular magnetic field is set. At this time, if the gaming machine frame 3 is open for changing or confirming the set value, canceling an error, restarting the game, etc., the gaming machine frame 3 is closed after the reference value is set. Become. Here, when the magnetic field around the magnetic detector changes due to the change in the state of the game machine frame 3 (specifically, the change from the open state to the closed state), as shown in FIG. 21-8 (A). In addition, the detection value of the x-axis magnetism detected by the magnetic detector changes significantly when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (t2), and the magnetic detection occurs when the amount of change in the combined magnetic field exceeds the threshold (t3). An error signal is output from the detector.

As shown in FIG. 21-8 (A), in a general configuration, a change in the magnetic field around the magnetic detector due to a change in the state of the gaming machine frame 3 is erroneously detected as an illegal magnetism, which makes the player uncomfortable. At the same time, there is a risk of increasing the management burden on the administrator. Further, in the case shown in FIG. 21-8 (A), since the reference value is not set appropriately, it is not limited to the timing when the magnetic field around the magnetic detector changes due to the change in the state of the gaming machine frame 3, which is incorrect. There is also a risk that something that is not magnetic will be mistakenly detected as illegal magnetism. On the contrary, there is a possibility that the illegal magnetism that is originally desired to be detected cannot be detected.

On the other hand, in the example of the configuration of the feature unit 136IW shown in FIG. 21-8 (B), when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (T1), the set value is changed or confirmed, the error is canceled, and the game is played. When the gaming machine frame 3 is opened for a restart operation or the like, the magnetic detector CLRT signal is not output from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) to the setting board 136IW300. Therefore, the power supply to the magnetic detector is not started, and the reference value for determining the erratic magnetic field is not set. After that, as shown in FIG. 21-8 (B), when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (T2), after a predetermined waiting period (T2 to T3) has elapsed, the main board 11 (game control micro) is used. The magnetic detector CLRT signal is output from the computer 100) to the setting board 136IW300. Then, the power supply to the magnetic detector is started, and the selection signal Sa is input. Then, in the magnetic detector, a reference value for determining an irregular magnetic field is set. In this case, since the state of the gaming machine frame 3 does not change after the reference value is set, erroneous detection can be suppressed.

As described above, the feature unit 136IW includes the first invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092 describes that operations such as changing set values are possible with the front frame of the pachinko gaming machine open. On the other hand, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-279247, changes in impedance due to a magnetic field applied from the outside to amorphous wires arranged along three axes orthogonal to each other are detected and detected based on the amount of each change. A configuration for detecting whether or not a magnet is present in the vicinity of a gaming machine using a magnetic sensor having a configuration for outputting a voltage is described, and such a configuration is described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. It may be applied to gaming machines. However, when simply applied, the opening and closing of the front frame (that is, the change in the state of the front frame) in order to perform operations such as changing the set value affects the detection value (for example, the reference value) of the magnetic sensor. , False detection may occur. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") (for example, a portion that executes step 136IWS029 in the game control microcomputer 100). When,
A game control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value.
A reference value (for example, a reference value for determining an illegal magnetic field set in the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204) can be set when the power is turned on, and an illegal magnetic field change is detected based on the reference value. With a magnetic detector (for example, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101),
A notification means for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality based on the detection of an illegal change in the magnetic field by the magnetic detector (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 performs the first magnetism in the main side error processing in step S22. When the error signal from the detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101 is in a state corresponding to magnetic field detection (magnet detection) (for example, high level), it is for notifying that an abnormality has been detected. Executes anomaly notification processing)
If the set value is changed when the power is turned on, the reference value is not set at least until the change of the set value is completed (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the setting change process is performed. When executed, the magnetic detector CTRL signal is not output (see FIG. 21-7) at least until the setting change processing is completed, and the setting board 136IW300 is until the magnetic detector CTRL signal is output. The power supply to the magnetic detector is not started, and the reference value is not set until the power supply to the magnetic detector is started (see Fig. 21-2).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection and preferably notify the occurrence of an abnormality.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention,
If the set value has been changed when the power is turned on, the reference value is not set until a predetermined period has elapsed after the change of the set value is completed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a game control microcomputer 100. When the setting change process is executed, the magnetic detector CTRL signal is not output until a predetermined waiting period elapses after the setting change process is completed (see FIG. 21-7).
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably detect an irregular change in the magnetic field.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
A power control means (for example, setting board 136IW300) for controlling the power supply to the magnetic detector is provided.
If the set value is changed when the power is turned on, the power control means does not supply power to the magnetic detector (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 does not perform the setting change process. When is executed, the magnetic detector CTRL signal is not output (see FIG. 21-7), and the setting board 136IW300 starts supplying power to the magnetic detector until the magnetic detector CTRL signal is output. No (see Fig. 21-2))
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably detect an irregular change in the magnetic field.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention,
A plurality of magnetic detectors (for example, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101) are provided.
The power supply control means supplies power to the plurality of magnetic detectors based on one signal (for example, the setting board 136IW300 receives the magnetic detector CTRL signal, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the first magnetic detector 136IW300. 2 Start supplying power to the magnetic detector 136IW101. See FIGS. 21-1 and 21-2.)
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the increase of parts and reduce the processing load.

Further, the feature unit 136IW includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092 describes that operations such as changing set values are possible with the front frame of the pachinko gaming machine open. On the other hand, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-279247, changes in impedance due to a magnetic field applied from the outside to amorphous wires arranged along three axes orthogonal to each other are detected and detected based on the amount of each change. A configuration for detecting whether or not a magnet is present in the vicinity of a gaming machine using a magnetic sensor having a configuration for outputting a voltage is described, and such a configuration is described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. It may be applied to gaming machines. However, when simply applied, the opening and closing of the front frame (that is, the change in the state of the front frame) in order to perform operations such as changing the set value affects the detection value (for example, the reference value) of the magnetic sensor. , False detection may occur. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") (for example, a portion that executes step 136IWS029 in the game control microcomputer 100). When,
A game control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value.
A reference value (for example, a reference value for determining an illegal magnetic field set in the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204) can be set when the power is turned on, and an illegal magnetic field change is detected based on the reference value. With a magnetic detector (for example, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101),
A notification means for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality based on the detection of an illegal change in the magnetic field by the magnetic detector (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 performs the first magnetism in the main side error processing in step S22. When the error signal from the detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101 is in a state corresponding to magnetic field detection (magnet detection) (for example, high level), it is for notifying that an abnormality has been detected. Executes the abnormality notification process),
Equipped with an openable / closable body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3),
When the opening / closing body is opened when the power is turned on, the reference value is not set until at least the opening / closing body is closed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a gaming machine frame 3). When is open, the magnetic detector CTRL signal is not output (see FIG. 21-7) at least until the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, and the setting board 136IW300 has a magnetic detector CTRL signal. The power supply to the magnetic detector is not started until it is output, and the reference value is not set until the power supply to the magnetic detector is started (see Fig. 21-2).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection and preferably notify the occurrence of an abnormality.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
If the opening / closing body is opened when the power is turned on, the reference value is not set until a predetermined period has elapsed after the opening / closing body is closed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is for a gaming machine. When the frame 3 is open, the magnetic detector CTRL signal is not output until a predetermined standby period elapses after the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (see FIG. 21-7).
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably detect an irregular change in the magnetic field.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
A power control means (for example, setting board 136IW300) for controlling the power supply to the magnetic detector is provided.
The power supply control means does not supply power to the magnetic detector when the opening / closing body is opened when the power is turned on (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a game machine frame 3). When is open, the magnetic detector CTRL signal is not output (see FIG. 21-7), and the setting board 136IW300 starts supplying power to the magnetic detector until the magnetic detector CTRL signal is output. No (see Fig. 21-2))
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably detect an irregular change in the magnetic field.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
A plurality of magnetic detectors (for example, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101) are provided.
The power supply control means supplies power to the plurality of magnetic detectors based on one signal (for example, the setting board 136IW300 receives the magnetic detector CTRL signal, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the first magnetic detector 136IW300. 2 Start supplying power to the magnetic detector 136IW101. See FIGS. 21-1 and 21-2.)
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the increase of parts and reduce the processing load.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 136IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by other feature units such as the feature unit 31AK to configure the gaming machine.

(Explanation of feature section 149IW)
Next, the feature unit 149IW will be described. First, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame formed in a vertically long square frame shape, a gaming board (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) constituting the game board surface, and a game board 2. It is composed of a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the above. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 3, a glass door frame having a glass window is rotated between a door opening position that opens the front surface of the game machine frame 3 and a door closing position that closes the front surface centering on the left side. It is movably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame, and when the glass door frame is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 3 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the frame 3 for the gaming machine and the glass. The door frame cannot be opened.

Further, the gaming board 2 and its peripheral members (for example, a substrate case including the main substrate 11 and the like) are configured to be removable from the gaming machine frame 3. Hereinafter, the gaming board 2 and its peripheral members (for example, a board case including the main board 11 and the like) are referred to as "board side members", and the gaming machine frame 3 and its peripheral members (for example, the power supply board 149IW17 and the payout control board 149IW18) are referred to. Sometimes referred to as a "frame-side member".

Further, in the feature portion 149IW, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member.

The setting switching main body unit provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 149IW06, is mounted on the main board 11, and the setting key 149IW06 can be operated without opening the board case. It is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right part of the back side of the substrate case.

Since the board case having the setting key 149IW06 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is impossible to operate the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. Operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using the door key. Further, since the setting key 149IW06 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the setting key 149IW06. That is, the set value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 149IW06 unless the clerk of the game hall or the like opens the frame 3 for the game machine with the door key. The setting key 149IW06 is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation. Although the feature unit 149IW illustrates a form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in addition to the function for executing the initialization process (see FIG. 3), the clear switch 149IW16 in the feature unit 149IW is for changing the setting value such as the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) in the setting change state. It also has a function as a setting changeover switch. As a result, the number of member points can be reduced as compared with the case where the switch for executing the initialization process and the setting changeover switch for changing the set value are provided with different members, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Here, the set value will be briefly described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 149IW is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the lowest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 to increase the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the larger the value is in the order of 2 or 3, the higher the advantage is.

Specifically, to change the set value based on the fact that the door open sensor 149IW15 is on (the door is open), the setting key 149IW06 is on, and the clear switch 149IW16 is on when the power is turned on. It is controlled to the setting change state that can execute the setting change process of. In the setting change process, the set value is switched each time the clear switch 149IW16 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 149IW07.

Further, when the power is turned on, the setting for confirming the set value based on the fact that the door open sensor 149IW15 is on (the door is open), the setting key 149IW06 is on, and the clear switch 149IW16 is off. The setting is controlled so that the confirmation process can be executed. In the setting confirmation process, the current set value is displayed on the display monitor 149IW07 without switching the set value.

The game control microcomputer 100 performs the control to the setting change state and the setting confirmation state, the setting change process, and the setting confirmation process.

Further, in addition to the special variable winning ball device 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 149IW is provided with a special variable winning ball device provided with a predetermined probability variation region inside, and is inside the special variable winning ball device during a big hit game. The probability change is determined based on the passage of the game ball through the probability change area in the above, and the probability change state is controlled after the jackpot game is completed.

FIG. 22-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 149IW.

As shown in FIG. 22-1, the main board 11 has a magnetic sensor 149IW01, a count switch 23, a general winning opening switch 149IW02, a probability variation region switch 149IW03, a gate switch 21, and solenoids 81, 82 via a relay board 149IW05. 149IW04 is connected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-1, the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B are connected to the main board 11.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-1, the main board 11 has a first out confirmation switch 149IW10, a second out confirmation switch 149IW11, and a first prize confirmation switch 149IW12 via a relay board 149IW08, 149IW09 and a payout control board 149IW18. And the second prize confirmation switch 149IW13 is connected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-1, the touch sensor 149IW14 and the door opening sensor 149IW15 are connected to the main board 11 via the relay board 149IW08 and the payout control board 149IW18.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-1, a clear switch 149IW16 is connected to the main board 11 via a relay board 149IW08 and a power supply board 149IW17.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-1, the main board 11 is equipped with a setting key 149IW06 and a display monitor 149IW07 in addition to the game control microcomputer 100.

The magnetic sensor 149IW01 is a detection means for detecting an unauthorized operation using a magnet outside the pachinko game machine 1, and a magnetic sensor signal indicating a detection state of an external magnetic field due to the unauthorized operation is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Output. The game control microcomputer 100 has a communication unit capable of communicating with the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the hall management computer when a magnetic sensor signal indicating that an external magnetic field due to an unauthorized operation is detected is input. It is used to execute an abnormality notification process for notifying an administrator such as a hall staff that an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The count switch 23 is a detection means for detecting the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening, and the game control microcomputer 100 is provided with a large winning opening winning signal indicating the winning state of the game ball to the large winning opening. Output. When the big prize opening winning signal indicating that the winning of the game ball has been detected in the big winning opening is input, the game control microcomputer 100 has a predetermined number (for example, 14) of games with respect to the payout control board 149IW18. A signal indicating that the ball will be paid out as a prize ball is transmitted. Upon receiving the signal, the payout control board 149IW18 controls to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls as prize balls, and also uses a prize ball control signal indicating that the prize balls have been normally paid out for game control. It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100.

The general winning opening switch 149IW02 is a detection means for detecting the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 10, and indicates the winning state of the game ball to the general winning opening 10 on the game control microcomputer 100. Outputs a winning signal. When the general winning opening winning signal indicating that the game ball has been won in the general winning opening 10 is input, the game control microcomputer 100 has a predetermined number (for example, 10) with respect to the payout control board 149IW18. A signal indicating that the game ball will be paid out as a prize ball is transmitted. Upon receiving the signal, the payout control board 149IW18 controls to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls as prize balls, and also uses a prize ball control signal indicating that the prize balls have been normally paid out for game control. It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100.

The probabilistic region switch 149IW03 is a detection means for detecting the winning of the game ball in the probabilistic region, and outputs a probabilistic region winning signal indicating the winning state of the game ball to the probabilistic region to the game control microcomputer 100. .. When the probability change area winning signal indicating that the game ball has been won in the probability change area is input, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game control to the probability change state after the big hit game is completed.

The gate switch 21 is a detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41, and outputs a gate passing signal indicating the passing state of the game ball to the passing gate 41 to the game control microcomputer 100. .. When the gate passing signal indicating that the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected is input, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to store the normal drawing hold storage.

The solenoid 81 is a drive member for changing the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) into a closed state and an open state. The game control microcomputer 100 changes the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) to the open state when allowing the winning of the game ball to the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). The solenoid drive signal for this is output to the solenoid 81.

The solenoid 82 is a driving member for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 into a closed state and an open state. When the game control microcomputer 100 allows the special variable winning ball device 7 to win a game ball, the game control microcomputer 100 outputs a solenoid drive signal for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state to the solenoid 82.

The solenoid 149IW04 is a drive member for changing a special variable winning ball device provided with a predetermined probability variation region into a closed state and an open state. The game control microcomputer 100 outputs a solenoid drive signal for changing the special variable winning ball device to the open state to the solenoid 149IW04 when allowing the winning of the game ball to the probability variation region.

The first start port switch 22A is a detection means for detecting the winning of the game ball to the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and is a game to the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening). The first start opening winning signal indicating the winning state of the ball is output to the game control microcomputer 100. The game control microcomputer 100 stores the first hold storage when the first start opening winning signal indicating that the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening) has been detected is input. A signal indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are to be paid out as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 149IW18. Upon receiving the signal, the payout control board 149IW18 controls to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls as prize balls, and also uses a prize ball control signal indicating that the prize balls have been normally paid out for game control. It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100.

The second start port switch 22B is a detection means for detecting the winning of the game ball to the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and is to the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). The first start opening winning signal indicating the winning state of the game ball is output to the game control microcomputer 100. The game control microcomputer 100 stores the second hold memory when the second start opening winning signal indicating that the winning of the game ball has been detected in the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is input. A signal indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are to be paid out as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 149IW18. Upon receiving the signal, the payout control board 149IW18 controls to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls as prize balls, and also uses a prize ball control signal indicating that the prize balls have been normally paid out for game control. It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100.

The first out confirmation switch 149IW10 is a detection means for detecting the entry (discharge) of the game ball into the out port, and the first out confirmation signal indicating the entry state of the game ball into the out opening is played. It is output to the control microcomputer 100. Further, the second out confirmation switch 149IW11 is a detection means for detecting the entry of the game ball into the out port, and controls the game by controlling the second out confirmation signal indicating the entry state of the game ball into the out port. Output to the microcomputer 100 for use. The first out confirmation switch 149IW10 is provided on the upstream side of the second out confirmation switch 149IW11. That is, when the game ball is normally discharged from the out port, the discharge of the game ball is first detected by the first out confirmation switch 149IW10, and then the discharge of the game ball is detected by the second out confirmation switch 149IW11. Is to be done.

For example, when the game control microcomputer 100 receives the first out confirmation signal indicating that the game ball has been entered into the out port, the count value is added by "1" and the game ball to the out port is added. When the second out confirmation signal indicating that the incoming ball is detected is received, the count value is subtracted by "1". When the count value exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the game control microcomputer 100 considers that an error has occurred and uses a communication unit capable of communicating with the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the hall management computer. The abnormality notification process for notifying the manager of the hall staff or the like that there is an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed.

The first winning confirmation switch 149IW12 is a detection means for detecting that the game ball has been normally won in the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and is a detecting means for detecting that the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening) has been normally won. The first winning confirmation signal indicating the winning state of the game ball to the 1 starting winning opening) is output to the game control microcomputer 100. The first winning confirmation switch 149IW12 is provided on the downstream side of the first starting port switch 22A. That is, when a game ball is normally won in the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), the winning of the game ball is first detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, and then the first winning confirmation switch 149IW12. The winning of the game ball is detected by.

The second winning confirmation switch 149IW13 is a detection means for detecting that the game ball has been normally won in the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and is a variable winning ball device 6B. A second winning confirmation signal indicating the winning state of the game ball to (the second starting winning opening) is output to the game control microcomputer 100. The second winning confirmation switch 149IW13 is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port switch 22B. That is, when the game ball normally wins the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), the winning of the game ball is first detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, and then the second starting opening switch. The winning of the game ball is detected by 22B.

For example, the game control microcomputer 100 does not match the input first start opening winning signal and the first winning confirmation signal, or matches the input second starting opening winning signal and the second winning confirmation signal. If the error cannot be obtained, it is assumed that an error has occurred, and the pachinko game machine 1 is used for the manager such as the hall staff using the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the communication unit capable of communicating with the hall management computer. Executes an abnormality notification process for notifying that there is an abnormality in the computer.

The number of game balls detected by the first out confirmation switch 149IW10 and the second out confirmation switch 149IW11 (the number of game balls (out balls) that have entered the out port) and the game detected by the first winning confirmation switch 149IW12. The number of balls (the number of game balls (first start winning ball) that have won in the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening)) and the number of game balls detected by the second winning confirmation switch 149IW13 (variable winning ball device 6B). The total number of the game balls (the number of the second start winning balls) that have won the (second start winning opening) is the total number of the fired game balls (total number of launched balls). Therefore, based on the total number of shot balls and the number of game balls won in each winning opening, the ratio of the number of prize balls to the launched game balls (so-called base) and the bonus ratio (variable winning ball device 6B (second start)). It may be possible to calculate the ratio of the number of prize balls due to winning in the winning opening) or the large winning opening to the number of winning balls due to winning in other winning openings). The calculation result is displayed on the display monitor 149IW07. If the calculation result is a value outside the predetermined range, the hall staff or the like is managed by using the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the communication unit capable of communicating with the hall management computer. It may be possible to notify the person that the calculation result is a value outside the predetermined range.

Further, the first winning confirmation switch 149IW12 and the second winning confirmation switch 149IW13 are provided to confirm the winning of the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening) and the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). However, it may be possible to confirm the winning of other winning openings (large winning opening, general winning opening 10, probability variation area). For example, the flow passage of the game ball that won the prize ball device 6A (first start winning opening), the flow passage of the game ball that won the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening), and the big winning opening. The first prize confirmation switch 149IW12 or the second prize confirmation switch 149IW13 is provided with the flow passage of the game ball, the flow passage of the game ball that has won the general winning opening 10, and the flow passage of the game ball that has won the probability change area. It may be configured to join the passageway. In that case, the total number of game balls detected by each detection means (first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, count switch 23, general winning port switch 149IW02, probability variation area switch 149IW03) and the first winning. If there is a difference of a predetermined number or more between the total number of game balls detected by the confirmation switch 149IW12 and the second prize confirmation switch 149IW13, there is a risk of winning a prize due to fraudulent activity using a threaded ball or the like. Therefore, an abnormality that notifies the manager such as the hall staff that there is an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by using the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the communication unit capable of communicating with the hall management computer. The notification process may be executed. Here, the "predetermined number" is, for example, the maximum detection difference assumed when the game ball is clogged in the passage between each detection means and the first winning confirmation switch 149IW12 and the second winning confirmation switch 149IW13. ..

The touch sensor 149IW14 is a detection means for detecting that the player is in contact with the ball hitting operation handle 30, and a touch signal indicating the contact state of the player with the ball hitting operation handle 30 is used as a prize ball control board. It is output to the game control microcomputer 100 via the 149IW18. The prize ball control board 149IW18 controls to allow the game ball to be launched when a touch signal indicating that the player has detected contact with the hitting ball operation handle 30 is input. That is, even if the rotation operation to the ball striking operation handle 30 is performed while the touch signal indicating that the player has detected the contact with the ball striking operation handle 30 is not input, the game ball is not launched and the ball striking operation handle The game ball is launched when the rotation operation to the ball striking operation handle 30 is performed while a touch signal indicating that the player's contact with the 30 is detected is input.

The door open sensor 149IW15 is a detection means for detecting the state (open state or closed state) of the gaming machine frame 3, and is an open / close state signal indicating the state (open state or closed state) of the game machine frame 3. Is output to the game control microcomputer 100.

The clear switch 149IW16 is a detection means for executing initialization, and is a setting changeover switch for changing a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) in a setting change state, and is an operation state. A clear switch signal indicating (pressed or not pressed) is output to the game control microcomputer 100.

In the feature unit 149IW, the clear switch 149IW16 is connected to the main board 11 via the power supply board 149IW17, but it may be mounted on the power supply board 149IW17 or the relay board 149IW08, or it may be mounted on the main board. It may be mounted on 11.

The setting key 149IW06 is a detection means for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and outputs a setting key signal indicating an operation state (ON or OFF) to the game control microcomputer 100.

As described above, the game control microcomputer 100 has an open / close state signal indicating that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state and a clear switch signal indicating that the clear switch 149IW16 is pressed when the power is turned on. , The setting key signal indicating that the setting key 149IW06 is ON is input, and the setting change state is controlled. Further, when the power of the gaming control microcomputer 100 is turned on, an open / closed state signal indicating that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state and a setting key signal indicating that the setting key 149IW06 is ON are input. However, the clear switch signal indicating that the clear switch 149IW16 is pressed is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the clear switch signal is not input.

The display monitor 149IW07 is a display device for displaying the current set value. The game control microcomputer 100 outputs a display control signal for displaying the current set value to the display monitor 149IW07 in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state.

Further, the setting key 149IW06 is provided on the main board 11, and the magnetic force sensor 149IW01, the count switch 23, the general winning opening switch 149IW02, the probabilistic region switch 149IW03, the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch. The 22B is provided on the back surface of the game board 2, that is, these detecting means are provided on the board side member.

On the other hand, the clear switch 149IW16 is connected to the power supply board 149IW17, and the touch sensor 149IW14 and the door open sensor 149IW15 are connected to the payout control board 149IW18. The two-out confirmation switch 149IW11, the first winning confirmation switch 149IW12, and the second winning confirmation switch 149IW13 are provided in the gaming machine frame 3, that is, these detecting means are provided in the frame side member.

Although each detection means is provided on the panel side member or the frame side member, the member provided with each detection means is not limited to the one shown in the feature portion 149IW. For example, in the feature portion 149IW, a part or all of the plurality of detection means described as being provided on the panel side member may be provided on the frame side member, or conversely, the feature. In the unit 149IW, a part or all of the plurality of detection means described as being provided on the frame side member may be provided on the board side member.

FIG. 22-2 is a block diagram showing an example of connection between each detection means and the main board 11 in the feature unit 149IW.

As shown in FIG. 22-2, the detection signals from the magnetic force sensor 149IW01, the count switch 23, the general winning opening switch 149IW02, and the probability variation region switch 149IW03 are input to the input port 149IW20.

As shown in FIG. 22-2, the first out confirmation switch 149IW10, the second out confirmation switch 149IW11, the first prize confirmation switch 149IW12, the second prize confirmation switch 149IW13, the touch sensor 149IW14, the door open sensor 149IW15, the clear switch 149IW16 and The detection signal from the setting key 149IW06 is input to the input port 149IW21.

As shown in FIG. 22-2, the detection signal from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the power supply confirmation signal, and the prize ball control signal from the payout control board 149IW18 are input. Input to port 149IW22.

As shown in FIG. 22-2, the solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81, 82, 149IW04 is output from the output port 149IW23.

As shown in FIG. 22-2, the display control signal to the display monitor 149IW07 is output from the input port 149IW24.

As shown in FIG. 22-2, the setting key 149IW06 is provided on the main board 11, and in the main board 11, the transmission path of the signal from the setting key 149IW06, the first out confirmation switch 149IW10, and the second out confirmation switch 149IW11 , The first winning confirmation switch 149IW12, the second winning confirmation switch 149IW13, the touch sensor 149IW14, the door opening sensor 149IW15, and the transmission path of the detection signal from the clear switch 149IW16 are joined. As a result, there are few board design changes and wiring routing, and security can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-2, the setting key 149IW06 and the display monitor 149IW07 are mounted as electronic components on the main board 11, but are not limited thereto. For example, the setting key 149IW06 and the display monitor 149IW07 may be mounted on a specific board different from the main board 11, and the main board 11 and the specific board may be housed in the same board case.

Hereinafter, the input port 149IW20 may be referred to as “input port 0”, the input port 149IW21 may be referred to as “input port 1”, and the input port 149IW22 may be referred to as “input port 2”.

FIG. 22-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit allocation of an input port in the game control microcomputer 100. When a plurality of input ports into which signals from a plurality of detection means are input are provided, it is conceivable to classify the input ports for each member (frame-side member, board-side member) provided with the detection means. Therefore, first, regarding the first example (an example that does not correspond to the block diagram shown in FIG. 22-2), the input port is divided for each member (frame side member, board side member) provided with the detection means. This will be described with reference to FIG. 22-3 (A).

For example, in the first example, as shown in FIG. 22-3 (A), the detection signals from the detection means provided on the board-side member are input to the input ports 0 and 2, and are provided on the frame-side member. When the detection signal from the detection means is connected so as to be input to the input port 1, the detection signals of the setting key 149IW06, the count switch 23, and the general winning port switch 149IW02 are connected to the bits 0, 1 and 5 of the input port 0, respectively. Entered.

Further, bits 0 to 7 of the input port 1 have a first out confirmation switch 149IW10, a second out confirmation switch 149IW11, a magnetic force sensor 149IW01, a first prize confirmation switch 149IW12, a second prize confirmation switch 149IW13, and a touch sensor 149IW14, respectively. , The detection signal of the door open sensor 149IW15 and the clear switch 149IW16 is input.

Further, the detection signals of the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the gate switch 21 are input to the bits 0, 1 and 3 of the input port 1, respectively, and the detection signals of the first start port switch 22A and the gate switch 21 are input to the bits 6 and 7 of the input port 1, respectively. Is input with a power supply confirmation signal and a prize ball control signal from the payout control board 149IW18, respectively.

In this way, the detection signals from the detection means provided on the panel side member are input to the input ports 0 and 2, and the detection signals from the detection means provided on the frame side member are input to the input port 1. In this case, the detection signal of the setting key 149IW06 is input to the input port 0, while the detection signals of the door open sensor 149IW15 and the clear switch 149IW16 are input to the input port 1. In that case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the detection signal of the setting key 149IW06 from the input port 0 and opens the door when determining whether to control the setting change state or the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on. It is necessary to perform processing for reading the detection signals of the sensor 149IW15 and the clear switch 149IW16 from the input port 1, respectively, which imposes a heavy processing load.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22-3 (B), the input port is divided for each member (frame-side member, board-side member) provided with the detection means, and the setting key 149IW06 is input for the frame-side member. A second example of connecting to the port 1 (an example corresponding to the block diagram shown in FIG. 22-2) will be described.

For example, as shown in FIG. 22-3 (B), detection signals mainly from the detection means provided on the panel side member are input to the input ports 0 and 2, and the detection means mainly provided on the frame side member. Detection of the setting key 149IW06, the door open sensor 149IW15, and the clear switch 149IW16 by connecting so that the detection signal from is input to the input port 1 and the detection signal of the setting key 149IW06 is input to the input port 1. The signal will be input to the input port 1. In that case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the detection signals of the setting key 149IW06, the door opening sensor 149IW15, and the clear switch 149IW16 when determining whether to control the setting change state or the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on. Since the processing can be performed collectively, it is possible to prevent an increase in the processing load.

In the feature unit 149IW, "mainly" is a concept indicating that it occupies a majority. For example, if there is a group containing three elements and two or more of the three elements have special properties, the elements included in the group mainly have special properties. It can be said that there is. Specifically, in the case of "the detection signal mainly from the detection means provided on the panel side member is input to the specific input port", among the plurality of detection signals input to the specific input port, It indicates that the majority of the detection signals are the detection signals from the detection means provided on the panel side member.

Further, the signal from the detection means provided on the panel side member is mainly input to the input port 0, and the signal from the detection means provided on the frame side member is mainly input to the input port 1. There is. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in processing load. Specifically, when reading signals input from a plurality of detection means provided on the panel side member / frame side member, the signals can be collectively read from one input port, so that an increase in processing load is suppressed. be able to. Further, by providing an input port for inputting the detection signal of the detection means mainly provided on the panel side member and an input port for inputting the detection signal of the detection means mainly provided on the frame side member, respectively. , Since it is sufficient to provide a storage area corresponding to each input port, it is effective in reducing (saving) the storage capacity.

Further, as described above, the signal from the detection means provided on the panel side member is mainly input to the input ports 0 and 2, and the signal from the detection means provided on the frame side member is mainly input to the input port 1. However, the setting key 149IW06 is provided on the panel side member but is configured to be input to the input port 1. As a result, from the gaming machine configured so that each detecting means is connected to the input port corresponding to the position where each detecting means is provided (the gaming machine connected as shown in FIG. 22-3 (A)). With few changes, it is possible to realize that the signals from the setting key 149IW06, the door open switch 149IW15 and the clear switch 149IW16 are input to one input port.

Specifically, when the setting key 149IW06 is reconnected to the input port 1 from the gaming machine connected as shown in FIG. 22-3 (A), the door opening switch 149IW15 and the clear switch 149IW16 are connected to the input port 0. It is possible to realize that the signals from the setting key 149IW06, the door open switch 149IW15 and the clear switch 149IW16 are input to one input port with less change than reconnecting.

It should be noted that the clear switch 149IW16 may be provided on the panel side member, and in that case, "a game configured so that each detection means is connected to an input port corresponding to the position where each detection means is provided." As the "machine", a gaming machine connected so that the signal from the clear switch 149IW16 and the signal from the setting key 149IW06 are input to the input port 0 and the signal from the door open switch 149IW15 is input to the input port 1 is assumed. Therefore, reconnecting the door open switch 149IW15 to the input port 1 has less changes than reconnecting the clear switch 149IW16 and the setting key 149IW06 to the input port 0, with the setting key 149IW06, the door opening switch 149IW15 and It can be realized that the signal from the clear switch 149IW16 is input to one input port.

It should be noted that the clear-only switch for executing the initialization process and the setting changeover switch for changing the set value may be provided by different members, and in that case, the functions of each switch are clearly distinguished. Therefore, the operability can be improved. In that case, it is assumed that the setting changeover switch is provided on the main board 11 and the signal from the clear-only switch provided on the frame side member is input to the input port 1, but the signal from the setting changeover switch May be input to any input port.

For example, if the signals from the door opening sensor 149IW15, the setting key 149IW06, the clear-only switch and the setting changeover switch are input to one input port, the door open sensor 149IW15, the setting key 149IW06, the clear-only switch and the setting changeover switch. Since the signals from the switches can be read in a batch, an increase in processing load can be suppressed.

Further, for example, the signal from the door open sensor 149IW15, the setting key 149IW06, and the clear-only switch is read out to determine whether or not to control the setting change state, and the signal from the setting changeover switch is in the setting change state. Since it is read to determine whether or not to switch the set value, the timing of reading the signal from the door open sensor 149IW15, the setting key 149IW06, and the clear-only switch is different from the timing of reading the signal from the setting changeover switch. Therefore, even if the signal from the setting changeover switch is input to an input port different from the input port to which the signal from the door open sensor 149IW15, the setting key 149IW06 and the clear-only switch is input, the processing load does not increase. Is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-3 (B), the signal input to the input port 0 is mainly "0" (the input becomes low level), so that the signal is turned off while being "1". While it is a positive logic that turns on when it becomes (input becomes high level), the signal input to input port 1 mainly becomes "1" and turns off while it becomes "0". It is a negative logic that turns on when it becomes. As a result, even when an illegal radio wave is transmitted by a so-called radio wave goto and an illegal act of illegally turning on each detection means occurs, the signal input to the input port 0 and the signal input to the input port 1 It is possible to prevent both from being turned on at the same time.

Further, it has a board-side wiring connected to the main board 11 from the detection means provided on the game board-side member, and a frame-side wiring connected to the main board 11 from the detection means provided on the frame-side member. However, it is considered that the frame side wiring is longer than the board side wiring and is easily affected by noise. Therefore, by setting the detection signal (mainly the detection signal input to the input port 1) transmitted by the frame side wiring as the negative logic as described above, the detection signal is turned on even if noise is generated in the off state. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection as a state.

In the example shown in FIG. 22-3 (B), the logic and state of the prize ball control signal (bit 7 of the input port 2) are not described, but this is the prize ball output from the payout control board 149IW18. This is because the control signal has a different signal format from the detection signal from other detection means. The prize ball control signal may be a signal composed of a plurality of bits, and like other detection signals, "0" indicates that the payout of the prize ball has been completed, and "1" indicates that the payout of the prize ball has been completed. It may be a signal indicating that the payout of the prize ball has been completed.

Further, the power supply confirmation signal is not shown in FIG. 22-1, because the detection circuit for detecting the power supply confirmation signal is mounted on the main board 11. Since the detection circuit for detecting the power supply confirmation signal is mounted on the main board 11 in this way, the state of the power supply confirmation signal can be monitored according to the control status on the main board 11, and therefore the power supply voltage. When the voltage is reduced, processing such as backup on the main board 11 can be performed more safely.

Further, a detection circuit for detecting the power supply confirmation signal may be mounted on the power supply board 149IW17. For example, when the control means in the power supply board 149IW17 detects a decrease in the power supply voltage based on the power supply confirmation signal. , A signal indicating that effect may be transmitted to another board (main board 11, payout control board 149IW18, staging control board 12, etc.). In that case, the manufacturing cost can be reduced because the processing at the time of power failure can be performed with a smaller number of parts than when the detection circuit for detecting the power supply confirmation signal is mounted on each board. It should be noted that each board that has received a signal indicating a decrease in the power supply voltage from the power supply board 149IW17 may be subjected to a process of backing up various data.

The feature unit 149IW has been described using a so-called pachinko machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other gaming machines such as slot machines (pachislot machines) may be used. A slot machine generally has a variable display unit having a plurality of (usually three) reels on which a plurality of types of symbols as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral portion, and each reel is started by a player. The rotation is started by operating the lever, and the player operates the stop button provided corresponding to each reel to rotate within a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. Stop. Then, a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all the reels is stopped.

For example, it is provided with the above-mentioned setting key, a clear switch, and a door opening sensor for detecting the open / closed state of an openable / closable housing portion (including peripheral members such as the housing and power supply board), and a detection signal from the setting key. The detection signal from the clear switch and the detection signal from the door open sensor may be a slot machine in which the detection signal is input to one of the plurality of input ports included in the control means.

Further, for example, the housing portion is provided with a detachable variable display unit (including peripheral members such as a reel, a liquid crystal display device, and a main board), and the detection signal of the detection means provided in the housing portion is mainly input. The slot machine may be provided with an input port on the side of the housing unit and an input port on the side of the variable display unit on which the detection signal of the detection means provided in the variable crystal display unit is mainly input.

Further, for example, the detection signal of the setting key provided in the variation display unit may be a slot machine input to the input port on the housing unit side, or the transmission path of the detection signal of the setting key provided in the main board. And the transmission line of the detection signal of the detection means provided in the variation display unit may be a slot machine where the transmission path of the detection signal merges on the main board.

As described above, the feature unit 149IW includes the inventions shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092 describes that operations such as changing set values are possible with the front frame of the pachinko gaming machine open. On the other hand, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-77349 describes a configuration including a control means (for example, a main board) provided with a plurality of input ports, and such a configuration is described in JP-A-2010-. It is conceivable to apply it to the pachinko gaming machine described in JP-A-200902. However, when simply applied, connecting a member that outputs a predetermined signal to an input port corresponding to the position where the member is provided (for example, if the member is provided in the game frame, the first input port). If the member is provided on the game board, it is supposed to be connected to the second input port), but there is a risk that the processing load will increase when reading the signals input to multiple input ports. be. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
An opening / closing body (for example, a frame-side member (including a gaming machine frame 3, a power supply board 149IW17, and a payout control board 149IW18)) that can be opened / closed.
An opening / closing detecting means (for example, a door opening sensor 149IW15) for detecting the state of the opening / closing body, and
A first operation detecting means (for example, a clear switch 149IW16) capable of detecting the first operation, and
A second operation detecting means (for example, setting key 149IW06) capable of detecting the second operation, and
A control means (for example, a main board 11) having a plurality of input ports (for example, input port 149IW20 to input port 149IW22 (input port 0 to input port 2)) capable of inputting signals is provided.
The detection signal of the open / close detection means (for example, the signal from the door opening sensor 149IW15), the detection signal of the first operation detection means (for example, the signal from the clear switch 149IW16), and the detection signal of the second operation detection means. (For example, the signal from the setting key 149IW06) is input to a specific input port (for example, input port 149IW21 (input port 1)) among the plurality of input ports.
The control means is
When the detection signal of the open / close detection means, the detection signal of the first operation detection means, and the detection signal of the second operation detection means are in a specific input state, a setting value of a plurality of stages (for example, a setting value ". The door opening sensor 149IW15 is turned on (the door is open) when the power is turned on in the setting means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any of the setting values from "1" to the setting value "3"). The part that changes the set value based on the fact that the setting key 149IW06 is on and the clear switch 149IW16 is on).
A gaming machine including, for example, a game control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set setting value. According to this feature, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the invention,
The gaming machine further includes a detachable body (for example, a board side member (including a board case including the game board 2, the main board 11, etc.)) that can be attached to and detached from the opening / closing body.
Detachable body side detecting means (for example, magnetic sensor 149IW01, count switch 23, general winning opening switch 149IW02, first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, and detachable body side detecting means provided on the detachable body to detect the first event, and Gate switch 21) and
An opening / closing body-side detecting means (for example, a first out confirmation switch 149IW10, a second out confirmation switch 149IW11, a first winning confirmation switch 149IW12, a second winning confirmation switch 149IW13, touch) provided on the opening / closing body to detect a second event. It is equipped with a sensor 149IW14, a door opening sensor 149IW15, and a clear switch 149IW16).
The control means mainly includes a first input port (for example, input ports 149IW20, 149IW22 (input ports 0, 2)) to which the detection signal of the detachable body side detection means is mainly input, and a detection signal of the open / close body side detection means. It is described that a plurality of input ports (for example, input port 149IW21 (input port 1)) including a second input port to be input to the input port may be provided, and processing is performed according to such a configuration. It is possible to suppress the increase in burden.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the invention,
The second operation detecting means is provided on the detachable body (for example, the setting key 149IW06 is provided on the detachable main board 11 together with the game board 2).
The detection signal of the second operation detecting means is input to the second input port (for example, the signal from the setting key 149IW06 is input to the input port 149IW21 (input port 1)).
It is described that the processing load may be increased, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the invention,
The control means includes a control board (eg, main board 11).
The second operation detecting means is provided on the control board (for example, the setting key 149IW06 is provided on the main board 11).
In the control board, the transmission path of the detection signal of the second operation detection means and the transmission path of the detection signal of the switch side detection means merge (for example, in the main board 11, the transmission path of the signal from the setting key 149IW06 and the transmission path. , 1st out confirmation switch 149IW10, 2nd out confirmation switch 149IW11, 1st prize confirmation switch 149IW12, 2nd prize confirmation switch 149IW13, touch sensor 149IW14, door open sensor 149IW15, and clear switch 149IW16. Will join)
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, there are few board design changes and wiring routing, and security can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the invention,
The control means is
When it is Y in step S3 in the initialization means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the initialization process is performed based on the input of the detection signal of the first operation detection means (output from the clear switch 149IW16). The part where step S8 is executed when the signal is on) and
In the setting change state, the setting value updating means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, which performs the process of updating the set value based on the input of the detection signal of the first operating means), the clear switch in the setting change process. It is described that the setting value may be switched every time the 149IW16 is operated), and according to such a configuration, the number of members of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Can be reduced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the invention,
A third operation detecting means (for example, a setting changeover switch) capable of detecting the third operation is provided.
The control means is
When it is Y in step S3 in the initialization means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the initialization process is performed based on the input of the detection signal of the first operation detection means (output from the clear switch 149IW16). The part where step S8 is executed when the signal is on) and
In the setting change state, the setting value update means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the setting is switched by the setting change process) that performs the process of updating the set value based on the input of the detection signal of the third operation means. It is described that the set value may be switched every time the switch is operated), and according to such a configuration, the operability can be improved.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 149IW can be appropriately combined with the configurations shown by other feature units such as the feature unit 31AK, the feature unit 121IW, and the feature unit 136IW to configure the gaming machine.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball hitting operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for staging control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
An opening and closing body that can be opened and closed,
An opening / closing detecting means for detecting the state of the opening / closing body,
A first operation detecting means capable of detecting a first operation,
A second operation detecting means capable of detecting a second operation,
It is capable of inputting signals and is provided with a control means having a plurality of input ports including a specific input port and other input ports.
The detection signal of the open / close detection means, the detection signal of the first operation detection means, and the detection signal of the second operation detection means are input to the specific input port among the plurality of input ports.
The control means is
A setting means capable of setting a set value when the detection signal of the open / close detection means, the detection signal of the first operation detection means, and the detection signal of the second operation detection means are in a specific input state.
Includes a game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value.
The signals input to the other input ports are more positive logic signals that are determined to be on when they are at high level, and the signals input to the specific input port are low level. There are more negative logic signals that are sometimes determined to be on,
The detection signal of the first operation detecting means and the detection signal of the second operation detecting means are signals having different logics.
The control means includes a control board.
The second operation detecting means is provided on the control board and is provided on the control board.
The open / close detecting means is provided on the open / close body and is provided on the open / close body.
In the control board, the transmission line of the detection signal of the second operation detection means and the transmission line of the detection signal of the open / close detection means merge.
The control means is a gaming machine including an initialization means that performs an initialization process based on an input of a detection signal of the first operation detection means.

Images